JP6687832B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  Pachinko game machines.

  In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered by a game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (gaming area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game ) The state is the mainstream Pachinko game machine that can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, a probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the big hit lottery and a time shortening game state that increases the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery There is also a gaming machine that is provided with the above-mentioned, etc. and enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 61-255680 JP, 2005-296613, A JP, 2005-152440, A JP, 2007-313212, A

  However, since many such game machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that realizes more novel game play is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game start). A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and when it is displaced in the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening mouth (for example, the first opening entrance C22). , A allocating member (for example, allocating member C24) configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied. Means and
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is satisfied. Means and
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the second main game identification information on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second Second main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a special winning a prize mouth C10)? Or, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22).
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) is configured to be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23).
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
In the case where the win / no win determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) may be displaced. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations of displacing it to the closed state Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game decision executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game to be performed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaceable upon execution of the easy-ball game.
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the information belonging to the predetermined group is different,
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a first specific game state after the special game is finished, and a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a second specific game state after the special game is finished, Have at least
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and is in a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed, it is in a high probability lottery state and the second identification The percentage of the gaming state is a high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and becomes a high probability lottery state after the special game executed. It is configured to be smaller than the ratio of being in the state and the second specific game state ,
There is a first specific hold that is the first hold that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the first hold is that the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied before the first specific hold. In a situation where the first pre-hold is present, the first pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the first specific hold can be executed in the effect display unit,
There is a second specific hold that is a second hold that satisfies the second predetermined condition, and is a second hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information before the second specific hold. Under the situation where the second pre-hold is present, the second pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the second specific hold can be executed in the effect display unit,
In the high probability lottery state and the first specific game state, the first prefetch effect can be executed, while the second prefetch effect is not executed,
In a high probability lottery state and a second specific game state, the second prefetch effect can be executed, while the first prefetch effect is configured not to be executed Pachinko game machine Is.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a more novel gaming property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration applicable to this example. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is completed. FIG. 17 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 26 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is finished. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a first main game hold prefetching determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a second main game hold prefetching determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 40 is an operation diagram relating to the opening entrance of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. 43 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the promotion count control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first non-electric auditors product drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the second non-electric auditors product drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram relating to the distribution member unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth modification from the third embodiment. 64 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 of the third embodiment.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only a prize in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" is sometimes called a main game pattern / special pattern (special drawing) or a decorative pattern (design), but the "special pattern (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled by the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, identification information fluctuations / stops, advance notices, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In the configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker) that can take the following, the entry state = easy winning state and the withdrawal state = non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for deciding some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, as random numbers, hard Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning / non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... Is called one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notification of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. "Expected average execution time of easy-entering ball game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary game symbol is continuously performed (for example, a situation in which a hold relating to the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example, , When the variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function operating state / non-operating state), the winning of the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member High and low probability (so-called universal figure high probability state / low probability state), long and short fluctuation time of ordinary pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers opening of variable member (so-called general pattern variation reduction function Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variable display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , Which is an expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”), but if there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type Is the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss or a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variation display period with the highest selection probability It is also possible to add that the concept is limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index that indicates the progressing speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variation display period of the identification information As a method of realizing different "average values", different candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are added, or further variable display periods are added even if the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing, but it is not limited to either method). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period is the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period. At least having a variable period state, ”means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, according to the number of times the identification information is fluctuated and displayed, a state transition of “first fluctuating period state” → “second fluctuating period state” → “third fluctuating period state” is performed. Including what can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state (of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state that continues until the next big hit + the electric Chu easy opening state (Despite the situation where the next big hit occurrence is definite, the next big hit cannot be obtained The more the situation continues, the faster the game progresses, so you may be able to get rid of the feeling of fatigue at the time of so-called hamari). Further, as a feature of each state, in the "first variation period state", the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, " In the "third variation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variation period state", between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting. In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information is particularly likely to be relatively long when compared with the “first fluctuation period state” ( In other words, in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information is particularly long during the hit, as compared with other states. (I.e., a short fluctuation fluctuation display period in which the deviation is definite or a medium fluctuation fluctuation fluctuation display period that suggests a hit is not selected (or difficult to select), but reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation)) It is possible to exemplify that the display period is selected (or easily selected)}. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of execution of the special game" may be a period immediately after the end of execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol variations, or the special game. It may be a period after one or more times of symbol fluctuations are made after the execution of until the symbol fluctuations are made a predetermined number of times (that is, the high-probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is ended. If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range, so the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" In the case where the state transitions of and can be taken, the specific period can mean the stay period of the “first variable period state” and / or the “second variable period state”). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information about holding" means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the holding digestion, but there is a possibility that the special game will occur. The judgment criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning / winning lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "winning symbol determination random number" for deciding whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for determination, and the content of an event derived from these random number values (the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is true or false , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of stop symbol, the possibility of moving to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the criterion. In the case of suggesting, "indicating or notifying the existence of the hold" is, for example, an effect at the time when the hold is exhausted until reaching the hold (a pattern variation mode of a decorative pattern or it is performed in conjunction with it). Changing the execution mode of (background effect, etc.), etc., and when notifying, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator (may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) when the hold occurs. (In that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the holding sound and the sound such as BGM are changed at the time of the hold occurrence, and the lamp for the effect at the time of the hold occurrence. Changing the lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.), or the execution mode of other effects that are executed at the time of the occurrence of the hold (symbol variation mode of decorative symbols, background effects that are performed in conjunction with it) To To reduction, and the like. The “average value of the variable display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”), but if there is only one type of variable display period that should be selected, then Is the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss or a concept limited to only the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit (including so-called small hit time), or It may be a concept limited to only the variable display period with a high selection probability, that is, it is supplemented that the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, As a method of realizing different "average value of the variable display period of the identification information", different candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period, or the same candidate and / or selection probability of the variable display period are used. There are various methods such as changing the period value when adding a further variable display period, but it is not limited to any one method). The "stay stage" is a stage that is dependent upon controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect displayed when the stay stage is different {type of notice effect that can be executed, executed. The type of the background effect to be obtained, the execution frequency of the notice effect that can be executed, the execution frequency of the background effect that can be executed, the occurrence frequency of the reach effect (SP reach effect, development effect, etc.)} are different.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, modifications to one embodiment should be understood to be modifications of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the term “table” is not limited to that format, and one or more selection candidates may be selected from the plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that it is a mode that is associated. Furthermore, the numerical value as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modified examples (for example, the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery, the maximum number of rounds at the special game, the symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc.) is This is merely an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions of the first main game side and second main game side, conditions of probability variation game and non-probability variation game, time reduction game It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (in terms of conditions such as the time shortening game, etc.) may be appropriately changed unless they largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, in the first main game side and the second main game side, the relationship between the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed appropriately such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuation of the probability variation game state based on the meaning that it continues until the next big hit occurs, is "65535" set as the number of continuation (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, even if the realization method options based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiment or modification example Should be understood to be appropriately changed.

  Here, a configuration applicable to the pachinko game according to this example is shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. Further, the following concepts can be extracted (listed) from the configurations shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the embodiments described later is added to these concepts, not to mention the combination and separation of these listed concepts (conceptualization). May be. It is to be noted that a configuration in which the black circles (●) shown in the configurations 1 to 9 of FIGS. 1 and 2 are combined is a more preferable configuration, and the white circles (◯) are combined with the black circles (●) shown in the configurations 1 to 9. The configuration is also suitable. The time-saving game state according to this example may be that the main game time saving flag is on or the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, that is, the time saving game state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, and the non-time reduction game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not operating. The time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Further, the probability variation game state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation game state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

The pachinko game machine according to the present example may be configured to have an auxiliary game starting port, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1-1),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game start). A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and when it is displaced in the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening mouth (for example, the first opening entrance C22). , A allocating member (for example, allocating member C24) configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the second main game identification information on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second Second main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a special winning a prize mouth C10)? Or, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22).
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) is configured to be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23).
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
In the case where the win / no win determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) may be displaced. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations of displacing it to the closed state Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game decision executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game to be performed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaceable upon execution of the easy-ball game.
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the information belonging to the predetermined group is different,
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a first specific game state after the special game is finished, and a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a second specific game state after the special game is finished, Have at least
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and is in a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed, it is in a high probability lottery state and the second identification The percentage of the gaming state is a high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and becomes a high probability lottery state after the special game executed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be smaller than a ratio that is a state and a second specific game state.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1-2),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game start). A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and when it is displaced in the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening mouth (for example, the first opening entrance C22). , A allocating member (for example, allocating member C24) configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the second main game identification information on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second Second main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a special winning a prize mouth C10)? Or, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22).
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) is configured to be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23).
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
In the case where the win / no win determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) may be displaced. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations of displacing it to the closed state Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game decision executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game to be performed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
In the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of entering the high probability lottery state It is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in a low probability lottery state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
If it is in the specific game state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, and counting from the time of the specific game state, Until the unit is played the first number of times or the second number of times, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second number is more than the first number,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
It is configured so that the distribution member can be displaced upon execution of the easy-entering ball game,
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different,
If the specific game state is reached after the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the time when the specific game state is entered. It is configured to be in a normal game state by the above one unit is played a first number of times,
If the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, and if the special game state is entered after the special game is executed, start counting from the time when the special game state is entered. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so as to be in a normal game state by performing the one unit a second number of times.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1-3),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game start). A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution entrance is set to one of the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening entrance C23). It is a member that changes toward the first aspect, and when it is displaced to the first aspect, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22), and when it is displaced to the second aspect, the second A distribution member (for example, distribution member C24) configured so that a game ball can be easily inserted into the opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the second main game identification information on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second Second main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a special winning a prize mouth C10)? Or, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22).
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) is configured to be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23).
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
In the case where the win / no win determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) may be displaced. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations of displacing it to the closed state Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game decision executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game to be performed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
In the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of entering the high probability lottery state It is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in a low probability lottery state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
If it is in the specific game state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, and counting from the time of the specific game state, Until the unit is played a certain number of times, it is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaceable upon execution of the easy-ball game.
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the information belonging to the predetermined group is different,
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1-4),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game start). A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and when it is displaced in the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening mouth (for example, the first opening entrance C22). , A allocating member (for example, allocating member C24) configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the second main game identification information on the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second Second main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a special winning a prize mouth C10)? Or, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22).
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) is configured to be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23).
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
In the case where the win / no win determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) may be displaced. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations of displacing it to the closed state Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game decision executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game to be performed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
In the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of entering the high probability lottery state It is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in a low probability lottery state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
If it is in the specific game state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, and counting from the time of the specific game state, Until the unit is played the first number of times or the second number of times, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second number is more than the first number,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaceable upon execution of the easy-ball game.
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the information belonging to the predetermined group is different,
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different,
If the specific game state is reached after the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is counted from the time when the specific game state is entered. It is configured to be in a normal game state by the above one unit is played a first number of times,
If the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, and if the special game state is entered after the special game is executed, start counting from the time when the special game state is entered. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so as to be in a normal game state by performing the one unit a second number of times.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1-5),
A game board (for example, a game area D30),
A game ball distribution unit (for example, distribution start opening unit C50) arranged in an opening formed in the game board (for example, game area D30),
A first main game starting opening B (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening B (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the first main game starting opening B (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) is easy to enter the game ball as compared to the ball enterable or closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening B (for example, first) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) in which the game ball is difficult to enter in the main game starting opening BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and the game ball can easily enter the first opening when it is displaced in the first mode, and the second opening when it is displaced in the second mode. A distribution member B (for example, a distribution member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the mouth,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The game ball distribution unit (for example, distribution start opening unit C50)
A common entrance (eg, common entrance C51) that is a entrance through which a game ball can enter
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a ball can enter, and a first main game starting opening A (for example, a first main game starting opening) provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51). AA10),
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a ball can enter, and a second main game starting opening (for example, a second main game starting opening B10) provided downstream of the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). )When,
The first main game starting opening A (eg, the first main game starting opening AA10) and the second main game starting opening (eg, the common entrance opening (for example, the common entrance C51)) , A second main game starting opening B10) which is a member that is changed toward either the first main game starting opening A (for example, the first main game starting opening AA10) and the second main game starting. A distribution member A (for example, a starting mouth distribution member C50y) configured to alternately change toward a mouth (for example, a second main game starting mouth B10),
It is a variable member that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter the ball, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) when it is impossible to enter the ball or when it is open. The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd),
The main game department is
The first random number is obtained based on the ball entering the first main game starting opening A (for example, the first main game starting opening AA10) or the first main game starting opening B (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12). First random number acquisition means,
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after variably displaying the first main game identification information on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g), the first A first main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the main game identification information;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is there a predetermined number of balls to the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a special winning a prize mouth C10)? Or, a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a large winning opening C10) can be in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses,
The variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) can be opened by entering the first opening (for example, the first opening entrance C22).
The variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd) is configured to be opened by entering the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23).
The auxiliary game section (for example, the main control board M),
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game starting port (for example, the auxiliary game starting port H10),
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
In the case where the win / no win determination result based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) may be displaced. After displacing the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state within a certain displacement drive period, one or more operations of displacing it to the closed state Equipped with an easy-entering-ball game decision executing means for executing an easy-entering-ball game to be performed,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
The distribution member B (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced upon the execution of the easy-ball game,
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member B (for example, the distribution member C24) is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to include an electric accessory (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) at the starting opening and other entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration. Is
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (2),
Auxiliary game start opening where game balls can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance and can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a game ball can enter the predetermined entrance or compared to a closed state. A variable member that is easy to enter and is difficult to enter when the game ball is unable to enter or is open in a predetermined entrance when displaced to a closed state,
With an auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
Auxiliary game department,
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening,
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
If the result of the determination of success or failure based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member is moved from the closed state within the displacement drive period during which the variable member can be displaced. A pachinko game machine comprising: an easy-entering-ball game determination executing means for executing an easy-entering ball game in which the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times after being displaced to the open state.

The pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured to include a distribution member that distributes the game balls to a plurality of ball entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (3),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and when it is displaced in the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening mouth (for example, the first opening entrance C22). , When it is displaced to the second mode, it is provided with a distribution member (for example, distribution member C24) configured so that a game ball can be easily inserted into the second opening (for example, second opening entrance C23). It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to include a plurality of non-electrical accessories at the starting opening and other entrances, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (4),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting opening B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting opening (for example, the second main game starting). It is configured to include a variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be provided with a plurality of types of auxiliary gaming time saving flags, that is, may be configured to have a plurality of auxiliary gaming time saving states (or time shortening gaming states), and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (6),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
As the specific game state, there is a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which the displacement mode of the variable member C when the easy-enter ball game is executed is different from the first specific game state. It is a pachinko machine characterized by that.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may have different auxiliary game short time flags that are turned on after the big hits related to the big hit symbols are different depending on the big hit symbols, that is, auxiliary game short time states (or time reduction game states) may be different. May be configured as follows, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (7),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
As the specific game state, there is a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which the displacement mode of the variable member C when the easy-enter ball game is executed is different from the first specific game state. ,
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different.

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, the distribution member is displaced to the second mode after the first mode is maintained for a predetermined time, triggered by the auxiliary game winning (the first opening timing of the electric accessory) (the first mode). (The opening entrance to be guided is different between the mode and the second mode), and as a concept based on the structure,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (10),
It is configured so that the distribution member can be displaced upon execution of the easy-entering ball game,
When the easy-entering ball game is executed, the distribution member is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time, which is a pachinko game machine.

  In addition, the long opening of the electric accessory shown in “No. 11” in FIG. 1 is opening for a predetermined time or more, and the short opening of the electric accessory is opening for a predetermined time or less. A long opening is an opening of 0.5 seconds or more, and a short opening is an opening of 0.3 seconds or less.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured so that the average value of the expected value for winning prize balls in the jackpot on the first main game side and the average value of the expected value for winning ball prizes in the jackpot on the second main game side are different. Well, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (13),
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value relating to the number of award balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the information belonging to the predetermined group in a stop display mode is different from the expected value. Pachinko game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the ratio of the auxiliary game time shortening flag B being turned on after the big hit on the first main gaming side and the ratio of the auxiliary game time shortening flag B being turned on after the big hit on the second main gaming side are finished. It may be configured to be different, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (14),
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured such that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the belonging stop display mode is different.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this example,
It may be configured not to depend on the gaming state, but only on the big hit symbol so as to determine whether the auxiliary game time saving flag A is turned on or the auxiliary game time saving flag B is turned on, and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (15),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditors' product B11d), a normal game state and a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric role) more than the normal game state Object B11d) has a specific game state in which it is easy to open,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
The ratio of being in the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the first main game The identification information or the second main game identification information is configured to be different from the ratio of being in the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a group different from the predetermined group. Has been done,
In the normal game state, the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and the ratio of becoming the first specific game state after the end of the special game executed, In the specific game state, the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and the ratio of being in the first specific game state after the special game executed is ended. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be the same.

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, the opening pattern B of the electric accessory is relatively easier to enter the electric accessory than the opening pattern A (total opening time or long opening time is long). (Total opening time = total opening time when executing one or more releases when the auxiliary game side wins once, long opening time = auxiliary game side In the case of winning once in, the longest opening time when executing one or more releases), the concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (16),
As the displacement mode of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) when the easy-ball game is executed, the first displacement mode and the variable member C (for example, the first displacement mode) (for example, The second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by having a second displacement mode in which the period in which it is in the open state is long.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that, in the right area of the board surface, in order from the upstream, the electric accessory → the second non-electric accessory → the first non-electric accessory → the auxiliary game starting opening. As a concept based on composition,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (17),
A first main game starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
A second main game starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the first main game starting opening ( For example, the game ball can enter the first main game starting opening BA12) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening (eg, first main game starting) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the second main game starting port ( For example, the game ball can enter the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game start). A variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the mouth B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and when it is displaced in the first mode, the game ball can easily enter the first opening mouth (for example, the first opening entrance C22). , A allocating member (for example, allocating member C24) configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second opening (for example, the second opening entrance C23) when displaced to the second mode,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
As a downflow route through which the game ball flows down in the game area, it has a first downflow route and a second downflow route different from the first downflow route,
When the game ball flows down the second downward route, the variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd), the variable member B (for example, the second non-electric accessory B10hd), and the variable member C ( For example, it is configured to flow down in the vicinity of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d),
When the game ball flows down the second flow-down route, the variable member C (for example, the second main game start opening electric auditors B11d), the variable member B (for example, the second non-electrical auditor B10hd), The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the variable member A (for example, the first non-electric accessory A12hd) is configured to flow down in that order.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a game for the first non-electric accessory and the second non-electric accessory in a situation in which the auxiliary gaming short-time flag (auxiliary gaming short-time flag A, auxiliary gaming short-time flag B) is off. Even if a ball enters, it may be configured such that an error is not notified until a predetermined number of balls that are the conditions for closing the non-electric accessory (the first non-electric accessory and the second non-electric accessory). It is an error when the first non-electrical accessory has a predetermined number of balls entered, not the total number of balls entered into the electric accessory, and an error when the second non-electrical object has a predetermined number of balls entered. May be configured so that the concept based on the configuration is
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (18),
When the error determination condition based on the entry situation into the first main game starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) or the second main game starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) is satisfied Comprises an error determination means for determining that an error has occurred,
When the first variable member is in the open state, the first ball entrance is configured to be closed by a predetermined number of balls entering the first ball entrance,
When the second variable member is in the open state, the second ball entrance is configured to be closed by a specific number of balls entering the second ball entrance,
In the normal gaming state, it is configured to determine that an error has occurred when there is a predetermined number of balls into the first ball entrance,
In a normal gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to determine that an error has occurred when the specified number of balls has entered the second ball entrance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have a big hit symbol that shifts to the probability variation game state and a big jackpot symbol that shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state after the big hit ends. Further, it may be configured to have a plurality of types of probability variation big hit symbols which are big hit symbols that will be shifted to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends. Further, the proportion of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the second main game side may be configured to be higher than the proportion of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the first main game side. As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (19),
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a first specific game state after the special game is finished, and a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a second specific game state after the special game is finished, It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it has at least a special game C which is in a low-probability lottery state after the end of the special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that the proportion of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the second main game side is higher than the proportion of the probability variation big hit B in the probability variation big hit on the first main game side. The concept based on
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (22),
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and is in a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed, it is in a high probability lottery state and the second identification The percentage of the gaming state is a high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and becomes a high probability lottery state after the special game executed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be smaller than a ratio that is a state and a second specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured such that the average value of the expected value of winning prize balls in the probability variation big hit on the second main game side is larger than the average value of the expected value of winning prize balls in the probability variation jackpot on the first main game side. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (23),
When the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the special game A or the special game B, the execution of the special game A or the special game B The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player is the special game A or the special game executed when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. In the case of B, it is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be smaller than an expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by executing the special game A or the special game B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the stay stages are different depending on the auxiliary gaming time saving flag that is turned on, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (24),
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member, there is a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) is likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state. Cage,
As the specific game state, the first specific game state and the first specific game state are the displacement modes of the variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d) when the easy-enter ball game is executed. It has a second specific game state that can be different,
As a stay stage that can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), at least a first stay stage and a second stay stage that is a stay stage different from the first stay stage are included,
The display tendency of the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to be different due to the different stay stages,
In the first specific game state, the stay stage is configured to be the first stay stage,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that the stay stage is configured to be the second stay stage in the second specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that, in a part of the big hits that are the probability variation big hits B, the big hits that are not the probability variation big hits and the stay stages immediately after the big hits are the same, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (25),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
As a special game, it has at least a special game A that is in a high probability lottery state and is in a second specific game state after the end of the special game, and a special game C that is in a low probability lottery state after the end of the special game,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the stay stages are the same after the special game A and after the special game C.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that it always shifts to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends, and the probability variation game state ends depending on the number of symbol changes after the big hit ends, and as a concept based on the configuration, ,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (26),
From the first identification information variable display start stop display or from the second identification information variable display start to stop display as one unit, after the special game is finished and the high probability lottery state is reached, the number of repetitions of the one unit is a predetermined number of times. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured to be in a low probability lottery state when it becomes.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the number of times saved on the first main game side is less than or equal to a predetermined number, while the number of times saved on the second main game side is set to a predetermined number, and a concept based on the configuration as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (28),
The first main game identification information is assigned to the predetermined group as compared with the case where the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the high probability lottery state is reached after the special game executed. When the high probability lottery state is reached after the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs, the predetermined number of times is smaller, or the second main game identification information is in a predetermined group. When the high probability lottery state is reached after the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs and when the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined number of times is the same as when the high probability lottery state is reached after the end of the special game executed by.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured such that the first main gaming side has a probability variation big hit A and a probability variation jackpot B, while the second main game side has a probability variation jackpot B and no probability variation jackpot A. However, the proportion of the probability variation big hit B in the big hit may be higher on the second main game side than on the first main game side, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (29),
After the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, it is in the high-probability lottery state and may be in the first specific game state, or It is a high-probability lottery state and is configured to be able to enter the second specific game state,
After the special game executed by the stop display of the second main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the high probability lottery state and the second specific game state are possible, while It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being in a probability lottery state and configured not to be in a first specific game state.

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, when the number of consecutive winnings in the big hit reaches a predetermined number (probable variation upper limit value) in a situation in which the probability variation game state is reached, non-probability variation occurs after the big hit when the predetermined number of times is reached. It may be configured to be in a game state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
When the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state as one unit, when the one unit continues for a predetermined number of times, the low probability lottery state and the specific game state can be set. It is a pachinko machine featuring.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the average value of the time saving number of time shortened gaming state transitioned after the end of the big jackpot that is the probability variation upper limit value, whether the jackpot is a jackpot of the first main gaming side or the second main gaming side It may be configured to differ depending on whether it is a big hit, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (31),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
When the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state as one unit, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state when the one unit continues for a predetermined number of times,
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of the one unit is the specific number of times after the special game state after the special game ends. If it becomes, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
If the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the high-probability lottery state, the special game is executed, and after the special game is finished, the low-probability lottery state and the specific number of times when the game state is the specific game state are specified. Number of times A,
The special game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the high probability lottery state, and the specific number of times when the special probability state is in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the special game is specified is specified. If the number of times is B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific number B is configured to be larger than the specific number A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to execute a lottery for shifting from the probability variation gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state for each variation of the main game symbol, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (32),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
In a high probability lottery state, a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a low probability lottery state for each variation display of identification information.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the average value of the number of times saved and shortened after the big hit is different between the big hit on the first main game side and the big hit on the second main game side, and a concept based on the structure. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (33),
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of the one unit is the specific number of times after the special game state after the special game ends. If it becomes, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
The specific number of times after the end of the special game, which is executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, is defined as the specific number of times A,
When the specific number of times after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the second main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is set to the specific number B,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific number B is configured to be larger than the specific number A.

The pachinko game machine according to the present example may be configured to enter a specific area C22 during a big hit and shift to a probability variation game state after the big hit ends (also referred to as a ball making machine), and a concept based on the structure. as,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (34),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first big winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which the game ball that has entered the variable winning port can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering a starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
A win / fail judgment means for performing a win / fail judgment based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means,
Identification information display content deciding means for deciding stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit / miss judgment by the hit / miss judgment means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display device A20), the stop of the identification information is controlled to be stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means,
A special game advantageous to the player when the result of the hit / no hit determination by the hit / no hit determination means is a win and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed in the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information belonging to a specific group Special game control means to be executed,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10) than the normal game state, and is controlled to be in the specific game state after the end of execution of the special game. And a game state transition control means capable of
Having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
Having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Whichever of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Whichever of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When any one of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed Then, the execution contents of the special game are configured to be different from each other,
During the execution of the special game, the variable winning a prize hole (eg, the first big winning a prize C10) is present until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning a prize mouth (eg, the first big award winning prize C10) or a predetermined time passes. ) Is possible for the player to execute a unit game,
Ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game in a special game corresponding to the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is more specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be higher than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) in a unit game in a corresponding special game.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, the big hit on the second main game side is a long open big hit (a big hit that the big winning opening is long open in the distribution game execution round) than the big hit on the first main game side. May be configured to have a higher ratio, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (35),
In the case where the result of the success / failure determination by the second win / defeat determination means is a win and the stop identification information of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the win / fail determination by the first win / failure determination means is a win The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is relatively easily stopped and displayed as compared with the case where the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko game machine according to the present example may be configured to have a plurality of long open big hits (the type of long open big hit is configured so that the type of time-saving game state after the big hit can be different. May be), the concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (36),
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by having a plurality of types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to a first specific group of the specific groups.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured so that the first main gaming side has a higher winning probability of a small hit than the second main gaming side, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (37),
A first starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A second starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
With a variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first starting opening,
A first hit / miss judgment means for executing a first hit / miss judgment based on the first random number;
Based on the result of the first hit determination, a first identification information display content determination means for determining the first stop identification information of the first identification information,
Based on the determination by the first identification information display content determining means, the first identification information display control means controls the first identification information display part to variably display the first identification information and then to stop display the first stop identification information. When,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
A second hit / miss judgment means for executing a second hit / miss judgment based on the second random number;
Based on the result of the second hit determination, second identification information display content determination means for determining the second stop identification information of the second identification information,
Based on the determination by the second identification information display content determination means, second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information display section to variably display the second identification information and then stop display the second stop identification information. When,
When the result of the first win / no win determination or the second win / fail determination is a win, the first stop identification information or the second stop identification information is stopped in the first main game identification information display unit or the second main game identification information display unit. After being displayed, a special game control means for executing a special game that can bring the variable winning a prize mouth to an advantageous state for the player,
During the execution of the special game, it is configured to execute only one unit game in which the variable winning a prize is brought into an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning a prize or a predetermined time elapses. ,
A pachinko game characterized by being configured such that a rate of executing a special game based on a result of the second hit / fail judgment is lower than a rate of executing a special game based on a result of the first hit / miss judgment. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have a distribution starting opening unit for alternately allocating game balls to the first main game starting opening and the second main game starting opening, and as a concept based on the composition, ,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (38),
A game board (for example, a game area D30),
A game ball distribution unit (for example, distribution start opening unit C50) arranged in an opening formed in the game board (for example, game area D30),
A first main game starting opening B (for example, a first main game starting opening BA12) into which a game ball can enter,
An auxiliary game starting opening (for example, an auxiliary game starting opening H10) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution entrance (for example, distribution entrance C20) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to the first main game starting opening B (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) and is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and when the open state is displaced, the first main game starting opening B (for example, the first main game starting opening BA12) is easy to enter the game ball as compared to the ball enterable or closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the first main game starting opening B (for example, first) A variable member A (for example, a first non-electric accessory A12hd) in which the game ball is difficult to enter in the main game starting opening BA12) as compared with the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open.
A variable member that is attached to a distribution entrance (for example, a distribution entrance C20) and that can be displaced into an open state and a closed state. It is easier to enter the game ball into the distribution ball entrance C20) or compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is inserted into the distribution ball entrance (for example, the distribution entrance C20). Is a variable member C (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening (eg, a first opening ball entrance C22) provided downstream of a distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20). )When,
A second entrance (eg, second opening entrance C23) which is a entrance into which a game ball can enter and which is provided downstream of the distribution entrance (eg, entrance C20). )When,
The flow-down direction of the game sphere entering the distribution entrance (eg, distribution entrance C20) is defined as the first opening (eg, the first opening entrance C22) and the second opening (eg, the second opening). It is a member that changes toward any one of the opening ball entrance C23), and the game ball can easily enter the first opening when it is displaced in the first mode, and the second opening when it is displaced in the second mode. A distribution member B (for example, a distribution member C24) configured so that a game ball can easily enter the mouth,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a large winning a prize mouth C10) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit (for example, a main control board M) that supports a main game,
The game ball distribution unit (for example, distribution start opening unit C50)
A common entrance (eg, common entrance C51) that is a entrance through which a game ball can enter
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a ball can enter, and a first main game starting opening A (for example, a first main game starting opening) provided downstream of a common entrance (for example, common entrance C51). AA10),
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a ball can enter, and a second main game starting opening (for example, a second main game starting opening B10) provided downstream of the common entrance (for example, the common entrance C51). )When,
The first main game starting opening A (eg, the first main game starting opening AA10) and the second main game starting opening (eg, the common entrance opening (for example, the common entrance C51)) , A second main game starting opening B10) which is a member that is changed toward either the first main game starting opening A (for example, the first main game starting opening AA10) and the second main game starting. A distribution member A (for example, a starting mouth distribution member C50y) configured to alternately change toward a mouth (for example, a second main game starting mouth B10),
It is a variable member that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is compared with the closed state. It is easy to enter, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) as compared to the case where the game ball cannot enter or is open. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is provided with a variable member B (for example, a second non-electric accessory B10hd) that is being operated.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the probability variation number and the shortened number of times are different in the gaming machine in which the probability variation game state can be ended by the number of symbol variations, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (40-1),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and that can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a second starting port (for example, a second state). The game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a first big winning mouth C10, a second big winning mouth C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information is provided,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, first identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information display unit to variably display the first identification information and then stop displaying the first identification information. When,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, second identification information display control means for controlling to secondly display the second identification information after variably displaying the second identification information on the second identification information display part When,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) are displayed. Execute a special game that executes a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until there is a ball or a predetermined period has elapsed. With special game control means that is possible,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
In the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of entering the high probability lottery state It is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in a low probability lottery state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times,
If it is in the specific game state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, and counting from the time of the specific game state, Until the unit is played the first number of times or the second number of times, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second number is more than the first number,
It is a high-probability lottery state and is a specific game state, and the final round of the specific game state when the game state becomes the normal game state when the unit has been played a first number of times starting from the time when the specific game state is reached. In, the second identification information is configured such that the average value of the variable display periods of the second identification information belonging to a group other than the predetermined group is the average value A,
It is a high-probability lottery state and is a specific game state, and the last round of the specific game state when it becomes the normal game state by counting from the time when it becomes the specific game state and the one unit has been performed a second number of times In the above, the second identification information is configured such that the average value of the variable display periods of the second identification information belonging to a group other than the predetermined group is an average value B that is a value different from the average value A. It is a pachinko machine.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (40-2),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member that is attached to a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port) It is easier to enter the game ball in B10) than in the enterable or closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter or is opened in the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the state,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a first big winning mouth C10, a second big winning mouth C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the identification information. When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20), or a predetermined number. A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning a prize port (for example, the first award winning port C10, a second award winning port C20) can be in an advantageous state for a player until the period elapses. With and
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
In the high probability lottery state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the time of entering the high probability lottery state It is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in a low probability lottery state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times,
If it is in the specific game state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, and counting from the time of the specific game state, Until the unit is played the first number of times or the second number of times, it is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state,
The first number of times is the same as the predetermined number of times or more than the predetermined number of times,
The second number is less than the predetermined number,
A variable period state transition that has a plurality of variable period states in which the average values of the variable display periods of the identification information are different, and that controls from a certain variable period state to a variable period state different from the certain variable period state Is configured to be executable,
Until the first number of times the unit is counted from the time of entering the specific game state, when the normal game state is not reached, by the time the game state that is the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is completed The number of times of the variable period state transition to be executed is the first variable period state transition number,
From the time of entering the specific game state until the first unit is performed a second number of times, in the case where the normal game state is not reached, by the time the game state of the high probability lottery state and the specific game state ends When the number of times of the variable period state transition to be executed is the second variable period state transition number,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the first variation period state transition count and the second variation period state transition count can be different.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (40-3),
A starting opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member that is attached to a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a starting port (for example, a second main game starting port) It is easier to enter the game ball in B10) than in the enterable or closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter or is opened in the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the state,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a first big winning mouth C10, a second big winning mouth C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means for controlling the holding to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, based on the random number related to the certain hold, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit, control is performed so that the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning a prize mouth (for example, the first special winning a prize mouth C10, the second special winning a prize mouth C20), or a predetermined number. A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning a prize port (for example, the first award winning port C10, a second award winning port C20) can be in an advantageous state for a player until the period elapses. With and
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
A plurality of stay stages are provided as stay stages that are dependent upon controlling the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG).
The display tendency of the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to be different due to the different stay stages,
The stay stage in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is different from the stay stage in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect, which is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing a special game regarding a certain hold.
A pachinko game characterized by being configured to be able to execute the same pending look-ahead effect in a high probability lottery state and a specific game state and in a low probability lottery state and a specific game state It is a machine.
Also,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (40-4),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member that is attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and that can be displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when it is displaced to an open state, a second starting port (for example, a second state). The game ball can enter the main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). Is a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter as compared with the state where the ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a first big winning mouth C10, a second big winning mouth C20) that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), the first identification information is stopped. A first identification information display control means for controlling to display,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second identification information is stopped. Second identification information display control means for controlling to display,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a predetermined number of variable winning openings (for example, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20) are displayed. Execute a special game that executes a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning opening C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until there is a ball or a predetermined period has elapsed. With special game control means that is possible,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
When the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state as one unit, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state when the one unit continues for a predetermined number of times,
If it is in the specific game state, it is configured so that it can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The first fluctuation period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation is the second period in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is different from the first period. It has at least a period state, and it is controlled so that it can be the first variable period state in the specific period in the specific game state after the end of execution of the special game, and if it is the first variable period state, until the specific condition is satisfied. , Is configured to be controlled so as not to be in the second fluctuation period state,
From the start of variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, the unit is configured to be executed one or more times during the specific period. ,
As a stop display mode belonging to the first predetermined group of the predetermined group, has a plurality of types of stop display mode,
As a stop display mode belonging to a second predetermined group in the predetermined group, there are a plurality of types of stop display modes,
The period until the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special game state is reached after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of one of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the first predetermined group is , A period until the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special game state is entered after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of one of the plurality of types of stop display modes belonging to the second predetermined group Is configured to be relatively shorter than
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
On the basis of the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
A plurality of stay stages are provided as stay stages that are dependent upon controlling the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG).
The display tendency of the effect display contents displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to be different due to the different stay stages,
A pachinko game machine characterized by being configured such that a stay stage in a high probability lottery state and a specific game state and a stay stage in a low probability lottery state and a specific game state are the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured such that the stay stages are different between the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and as a concept based on the configuration, ,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (41),
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the stay stage in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is different from the stay stage in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state Is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example wins the big hit on the first main game side in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, thereby changing the probability variation game state and the time shortened game state after the big hit ends. The stay stage may be configured to be the stay stage A, and the concept based on the configuration is as follows.
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (42),
In the high probability lottery state and the normal game state, when the special game is executed by the stop display of the first identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and in the high probability lottery state If the special game is executed because the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group when the special game state exists, the stay stage after the special game is different. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is a probability variation game state when the probability variation number ≧ time saving number and time shortening variation time of the final variation in the game state, and a probability variation game state and time when probability variation number <time saving number. The variation time of the final variation of the shortened gaming state may be configured to have different tendencies (average value of variation time, whether variation time differs depending on the number of holdings, effect mode, etc.), and a concept based on the configuration. as,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (43),
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, one unit is set, and the number of repetitions of the one unit is predetermined after the high probability lottery state is reached after the end of the special game. When the number of times is reached, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state,
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of the one unit is the specific number of times after the special game state after the special game ends. If it becomes, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
In the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, and when the predetermined number of times is larger than the specific number of times, the second identification information belongs to a group other than the predetermined group in the final round of the specific game state. The average value of the variable display period of information is configured to be the average value A,
In the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, and when the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number of times, the second identification information belongs to a group other than the predetermined group in the final round of the specific game state. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the average value of the variable display period of information is configured to be an average value B which is a value different from the average value A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is the same as the stay stage in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. Based on the concept,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (45),
The pachinko game characterized in that the stay stage in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state is configured to be the same as the stay stage in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example is configured such that the variation mode determination table referred to when determining the variation time in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are the same. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (46),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
The table referred to when determining the variable display time of the identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the table referred to when determining the variable display time is configured to be the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured such that the tables to be referred to when determining the variation time are different between the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. , As a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (47),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
A table that is referred to when determining the variable display time of identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state A pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured so that a table referred to when determining the variable display time is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured such that the probability reference game state and the time-reduced game state are switched less frequently than the non-probability change game state and the time-reduced game state when the table to be referred to when determining the variation time is changed. However, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (48),
A variable period state transition that has a plurality of variable period states in which the average values of the variable display periods of the identification information are different, and that controls from a certain variable period state to a variable period state different from the certain variable period state Is configured to be executable,
After the special game is finished, it is in a high-probability lottery state and in a specific game state, and is in a high-probability lottery state and in a specific game state. After the game is finished, it is in a low-probability lottery state and in a specific game state, and is in a low-probability lottery state and in a specific game state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be many.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the probability variation game state when the probability variation number ≧ time saving number and the limited frequency table transition referred to by the time shortening game state, and the probability variation game state when the probability variation number <time saving number and Limited frequency table transition referred to time shortening game state is a tendency {table transition number, execution rate of reach variation (reach variation execution rate is probability variation game state and probability reduction game state when probability variation number ≥ time reduction number) , The table that is referred to for the longest time is compared with the table that is referred to for the longest time in the probability variation game state and the time shortened game state when the probability variation number <the time saving number), etc.) May be configured to, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (49),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
After the special game is finished, it is in the high-probability lottery state and becomes the specific game state, and when the predetermined number of times is the specific number of times or more, the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, the game state ends. The number of times of the variable period state transition executed until the first variable period state transition number,
After the special game, it is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a specific game state, and when the predetermined number of times is less than the specific number of times, the game state in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state is When the number of times of the variable period state transition executed until the end is the second variable period state transition number,
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first variation period state transition count and the second variation period state transition count can be different from each other.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present example may be configured to have a plurality of types of time saving, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (50),
As a game state related to the ease of opening the variable member, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
From the start of the variable display of the first identification information to the stop display or from the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, the number of repetitions of the one unit is the specific number of times after the special game state after the special game ends. If it becomes, it is configured to be in a normal game state,
The pachinko game machine is characterized by being configured to have at least a specific number A and a specific number B that is a specific number different from the specific number A as the specific number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be able to execute the same look-ahead effect in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and based on the configuration. The concept is
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (51),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect, which is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing a special game regarding a certain hold.
A pachinko game characterized by being configured to be able to execute the same pending look-ahead effect in a high probability lottery state and a specific game state and in a low probability lottery state and a specific game state It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state to a non-probability variation game state and a time reduction game state (a non-stochastic variation game state and a time reduction game state to a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state. ), It may be configured not to be executed across the prefetch effect, the concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (52),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
It is a variable member attached to the starting port, which is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced in the open state, the game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter than the closed state, When the game ball is displaced into the starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An effect display section that can display effects,
It is provided with a sub game part that controls the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win / fail judgment means for performing a win / fail judgment based on the random number;
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means for controlling the holding to occur,
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, control is performed so that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit and then the identification information is stopped and displayed according to the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold. Identification information display control means,
If the result of the winning / non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning a prize port can be in an advantageous state for the player. With and
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit, the effect display content control unit capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode in a predetermined display mode is a predetermined probability, and the first identification information or the second identification information is a stop that belongs to the predetermined group. The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect, which is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing a special game regarding a certain hold.
The hold prefetching effect is a high-probability lottery state and is configured to be inexecutable from a game state that is a specific game state to a low-probability lottery state and a game state that is a specific game state. It is a game machine.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, in the gaming machine in which the limited frequency table transits in the time-reduced gaming state, the limited frequency state A referring to the limited frequency table A and the limited frequency state B referring to the limited frequency table B. Is present,
(1) In the limited frequency state B, the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation that causes a loss when the number of holdings is the first number of holdings (for example, 0), and the number of holdings is the second number of holdings (for example, 3). The difference between the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation and the average value of the predetermined period causes a difference in the average value of the predetermined period.
(2) In the limited frequency state A, the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation that causes a loss when the number of holdings is the first number of holdings (for example, 0), and the number of holdings is the second number of holdings (for example, 3). The difference between the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation and the average value in the predetermined period does not occur.
(3) The second hold number (eg, 3) in the limited frequency state B is most selected, rather than the variation time that causes the most likely loss in the second hold number (eg, 3) in the limited frequency state A. The fluctuation time, which is easily lost, becomes longer.
(4) The limited frequency state B stays longer than the limited frequency state A (the number of fluctuations).
(5) The specific effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state B is not displayed in the limited frequency state A.
(6) In the time shortening game state, the prefetch effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) There are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency state B, but only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state B and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A may be configured to be different in type, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (53)
The first fluctuation period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation is the second period in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is different from the first period. It has at least a period state and is controlled so that it can be the first variable period state in the specific period in the specific game state after the execution of the special game, and if it is the first variable period state, after the execution of the special game The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it can be controlled so as to be in the second fluctuation period state after the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a prescribed number of times calculated from the above.

In the pachinko game machine according to this example, when the number of consecutive winnings for the big hit reaches a predetermined number (probable change upper limit value) in a situation in which the probability variation game state is set, non-probability fluctuations occur after the end of the big hit that reaches the predetermined number of times. It may be configured to be in a gaming state and a time shortened gaming state, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (54),
When the special game is executed in the high probability lottery state as one unit, when the one unit continues for a predetermined number of times, the low probability lottery state and the specific game state can be set. It is a pachinko machine featuring.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a timing at which the limited frequency table referred to in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (the number of symbol variations after the end of the big hit) They may be configured to be the same (the limited frequency table to be referred to may be the same or different in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and are only referred to. The timing of switching the limited frequency table is the same), and the concept based on this configuration is as follows.
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (56),
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
It is a variable member attached to the starting port, which is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced in the open state, the game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter than the closed state, When the game ball is displaced into the starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
Equipped with
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win / fail judgment means for performing a win / fail judgment based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
Identification information display control means for controlling the stop identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means,
If the result of the winning / non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning a prize port can be in an advantageous state for the player. When,
Equipped with
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
The first fluctuation period state in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation is the second period in which the average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information is different from the first period. It has at least a period state and is controlled so that it can be the first variable period state in the specific period in the specific game state after the execution of the special game, and if it is the first variable period state, after the execution of the special game After reaching a specific number of times that the number of repetitions of the one unit is less than the predetermined number of times from, it is configured to be controlled to be in the second fluctuation period state,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific number of times is the same in a high probability lottery state and in a low probability lottery state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example has a case where the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state are terminated by the number of symbol variations after the end of the big hit, and there is a case where it is not ended (substantially continues to the next big hit). May be configured as follows, and as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (57)
At least a stop display mode A as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and a stop display mode B which is a stop display mode different from the stop display mode A,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A, or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A When the specific number of times in a state is the first specific number of times,
A specific game after the end of the special game executed by the stop display mode B of the first identification information or the stop display mode B of the second identification information. When the specific number of times when the state becomes the second specific number of times,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the first specified number of times is configured to be larger than the second specified number of times.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to this example, when the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state continue until the next time, the variation pattern table after a specific number of times (the number of times saved when not continuing until the next time) is configured to change. Well, as a concept based on the configuration,
Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (58),
At least a stop display mode A as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and a stop display mode B which is a stop display mode different from the stop display mode A,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A, or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A When the specific number of times in a state is the first specific number of times,
A specific game after the end of the special game executed by the stop display mode B of the first identification information or the stop display mode B of the second identification information. When the specific number of times when the state becomes the second specific number of times,
The first specified number of times is configured to be greater than the second specified number of times,
The specific game after the end of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A, or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode A In the case of the state, a table referred to when determining the variable display time of the identification information that is variably displayed from the end of the special game to the stop display of the identification information that is the second specific number of times, (2) A pachinko game machine characterized in that the table is referred to when determining the variable display time of the identification information that is variably displayed after the stop display of the identification information that is the specific number of times. .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this example is an effect that can be executed during a big hit, and an effect that informs that there is a pending hold that will be a big hit in the pending state is in a non-stochastic variation game state and a time shortening game state. It may be configured so that it can be executed during the winning big hit (may be executed in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, or may be executed in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state), based on the configuration The concept is
Pachinko game machine according to this concept (59),
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
It is a variable member attached to the starting port, which is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced in the open state, the game ball can enter the starting port or is easier to enter than the closed state, When the game ball is displaced into the starting port when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member is configured to be difficult to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An effect display section that can display effects,
It is provided with a sub game part that controls the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
A win / fail judgment means for performing a win / fail judgment based on the random number;
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means for controlling the holding to occur,
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, control is performed so that the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit and then the identification information is stopped and displayed according to the determination content based on the random number related to the certain hold. Identification information display control means,
If the result of the winning / non-winning determination is a win, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the main game identification information display unit, a special game control means for executing a special game in which the variable winning a prize port can be in an advantageous state for the player. With and
The sub-game department
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving unit, the effect display content control unit capable of controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), a normal game state, and a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric role object B11d) more than the normal game state. ) Has a specific game state that is easily opened,
It is configured to be able to execute a hold prefetching effect, which is an effect that suggests the possibility of executing a special game regarding a certain hold.
When a special game is executed in a low probability state and a specific game state, the pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a hold-ahead look-ahead effect while the special game is being executed.

  Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko game machines are mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper bowl D20 and the lower bowl D22, and a sound effect according to a game state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information.

  Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win the second main game starting opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are provided apart from each other, and the game flows down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). While the ball is easily guided to the first main game starting opening A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game starting opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10, while being easily guided to the second main game starting opening B10. . It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and The two main game starting openings B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other, and in that case, the upper portion of the second main game starting opening B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game starting opening A10. You may.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game starting entrance ball information indicating the entrance when entering the ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 serves as a trigger for the lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Here, in this embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10, the left side of the game area D30 (center of the game area) The game ball flowing down (reference) may be configured so as not to be guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10}.

  Next, above the outlet D36, a first big winning opening C10 and a second big winning opening C20 are provided, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. Is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol and is in a horizontal rectangular shape, and has an outlet port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located above D36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d (and a first big winning). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult to win in the first special winning port C10 and an open state in which the game balls are easy to win (the first (1) The special winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Bello type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is a big winning opening and the opening can be closed or open (so-called slide attacker) This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second special winning opening C20 is in the open rectangular shape when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped in the jackpot pattern, and forms a horizontal rectangular shape. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and a second special winning prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detecting device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Bello type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll is a big winning opening and the opening can be closed or open (so-called slide attacker) This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and a missing "-" (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: low speed blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), the effect described later A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device for displaying an effect image including a decorative pattern that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol / second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations simulating a game of a slot machine. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding the auxiliary game symbol fluctuations (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that are not executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by flashing or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Production control means (sub-main control) that performs display control and the like on the main control board M that performs the control directly related to the profit of the person) and the production display device SG that adds interest to the inside of the game U Part) SM, a sub-sub-control part SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to winning of each prize hole. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to the plate D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) for the upper ball plate D20. The game area D30 A launching device D42 that launches one ball at a time, a launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on / off. A power switch Ea, etc., which is a switch, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls the sub-main control section SM for controlling various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display / stop display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG, and hold display, notice display, and the like. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {first main game starting entrance ball detection device A11s, second main game starting entrance ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance ball detection device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, general winning opening is a winning opening that has a prize ball but does not perform symbol lottery ], A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-described first special winning opening electric auditors solenoid C13, the second special winning opening electric auditors solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device which is essential to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM / sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production / game progress state, etc. can be sent to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information from an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize-ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player, and receives a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, and the ball feeding device). Etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separately provided and adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern or the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub control board S has the sub main control section SM and the sub sub control section SS, and the sub main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is a merit that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by constructing the integrated structure). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first / second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) relating to the effect, the prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M, and is communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. ROM and RAM, and elements such as CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

  The "random number" in the claims and the specification means, for example, "0" to "65535" or "0" to "0" assigned depending on the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). This is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "255". Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing a value along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears (initial value). ) Is defined by a value having an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  Further, the limited frequency, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or the selection rate, and continues for a predetermined period. Further, the table referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as a limited frequency table, the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, the game state and the special game end The limited frequency table to be referred to is determined by the number of changes in the subsequent main game symbol. Further, switching from a state that refers to the limited frequency table A (also referred to as limited frequency state A) to a state that refers to the limited frequency table B (also referred to as limited frequency state B) is referred to as transition of the limited frequency state. ing. It should be noted that the limited frequency state can be configured to have a plurality of numbers even in one game state, and the limited frequency state may transition a plurality of times in one game state. In addition, when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, the selection rate of the variation mode is made different by referring to the common limited frequency table (that is, the selection target The variation mode itself is the same, but the selection rate is different) (or the variation mode to be selected and the selection rate are the same, but a further fixed value to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode). May be adopted).

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a first / second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game starting opening electric auditors opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the driving (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main starting opening B10. is doing. In addition, the pachinko game machine which relates to this execution form has the winning a prize sphere counter MP33c which measures the winning a prize to the 1st large winning a prize mouth C10 and the 2nd large winning a prize mouth C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number and a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variation game in which the probability of a lottery for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reducing game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time shortening. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of hours saved is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has, for example, a function of performing a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability varying game or a time-reducing game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time there is a change in the symbol. Good (so-called, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stop display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first / second main game common peripheral device C is in the closed state during the normal game, and is opened under the predetermined condition during the special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has a possible auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Here, the design variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  Next, the stay stage management counter SM23c is configured to count how many times the main game symbol has changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game in order to switch the production stage. Further, the number-of-games counter SM23c2 is configured to count the number of times the jackpot is successively won during the specific game that is being continued.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the reset button of the power supply unit E ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (transmission at that timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPU MC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and saving in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is provided). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). To do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the data (backup) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure. Various information commands are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and described later). The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in the present example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 9B is executed), and the process of step 1018 is performed. Transition. After step 1018, the CPU MC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt period T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later in step 1100. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric auditors product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening in which the game ball wins. The prize payout control board KH is caused to execute the processing, and the processing for managing the result) is executed. Next, at step 1998, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side) immediately before execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power failure signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is cut off in the gaming machine, the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is cut off (in this example, at the time of NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information (for example, checksum) at the time of power cutoff based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in a form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of holdings. The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in Steps 1102 and 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserve ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires the gaming state of the auxiliary gaming side (the flag state of the auxiliary gaming short-time flag), and the obtained gaming state of the auxiliary gaming side and the relevant gaming state. Main game board to determine the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of M.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol "D0, D1" is present, and the stop symbol which is the winning symbol is "D1", and each of them is released due to the stop. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the opening mode of the electric accessory is (0.2 seconds open → closed). Further, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4. It is configured to be open for 0 seconds → closed). The stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time-reducing game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time-reducing game.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game short-time flag), the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer. After starting MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol is fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit" (in this example, D1 and D2). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the hit pattern on the auxiliary game side, open mode (for example, in the case of hit pattern "D1", open for 1 second → close for 1 second) → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Open mode to be closed, in the case of winning pattern "D2", open for 0.2 seconds, close for 0.8 seconds, open for 5 seconds) Then, the predetermined time relating to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10. Next, in step 1238, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 and sets the electric accessory open flag. It is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

  In addition, if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process proceeds to (processing of step 1300).

  Further, in the present flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately shifts to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it has received the first main game starting mouth entrance information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting mouth A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls relating to the main game (particularly the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning / non-winning lottery random number for determining the win / fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (holding generation command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game starting mouth entrance information from the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main starting mouth B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls related to the main game (particularly the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / discarding lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired, as in the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win / loss lot number for the first main game and the win / loss lot number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired (holding generation command) to the sub-main control section SM. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Note that if No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted, but the information of the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be added and transmitted, and it is also possible to substitute the information indicating that the random number has been acquired from these information.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing relating to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and the next process {steps 1400 (1) and (2) process } To move. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {step 1400 (1), (2) Processing}.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) It is configured to give priority to executing the second main game symbol holding digest, but it is not limited to this (holding digest based on winning order or both main game symbols in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is selectively performed).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since the processing is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, if a fixed fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the fixed fixed time, the variation start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPU MC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the present symbol variation ( While reading the second main game content determination random number), the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1408, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol winning / winning lottery based on the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (particularly, winning lottery random number).

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win / loss lottery table (second main game win / loss lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small hit may be provided on the first main game side and / or the second main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the main game based on the main game symbol winning and drawing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols related to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game from a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "5A / 7A" and "5B / 7B") The symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 5A, 5B is 8R, 7A, 7B is 16R. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may}.

  Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the main game symbol win / win lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the game symbol is determined, these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Here, FIG. 12 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is configured to be determined based on the win / no win result of the main game symbol. In other words, when the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls, but it is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying that it is good. Furthermore, in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is on), the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side may be configured to be a relatively long time {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy to cause the second main game side to be held by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous to the player. This is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

  Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) relating to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M, and A command related to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Sent to). Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process moves to step 1428, and if No in step 1426, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting to the sub-main control section SM information (symbol finalization display instruction command) indicating that the symbol variation is finished. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) stops the variable display of the main game symbol, and controls the display of the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, if No in step 1436, the process moves to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1428, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. If Yes in step 1554, in step 1556, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag, and proceeds to step 1570. Even if No in step 1552 or step 1556, the process proceeds to step 1570.

  Next, in step 1570, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1574, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1574, in step 1576, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1578, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1570 or step 1574, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short time flag / auxiliary game short time flag). Next, in step 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1608, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). Even if No in step 1602, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in steps 1704 and 1706, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1708, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the information (special game start display instruction command) indicating that the special game is started in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process moves to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been given, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

  Next, at step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that continues to open, a pattern that opens and closes). To do. Next, in step 1716, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1720, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). To open the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20), set the special game timer MP34t (especially opening time timer) to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and start the operation. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a game state command relating to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control unit SM side. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (in the control command transmission process of step 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines a predetermined number (for example, 10) to the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and the predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening. Is determined. If Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1726, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). Is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1733, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum round number). . If Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1738, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1750, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after completion of a special game described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1770, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1771, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1772, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is a time saving A big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with the smallest number of time saving, in the present example, 2A / 2B). To do. If Yes in step 1772, in step 1773, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value A (60 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1772, at step 1775, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the current stop symbol as a time reduction A large hit symbol (the time reduction number is a medium hit symbol, in this example, 3A). Or not. If Yes in step 1775, in step 1776, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1775, in other words, when the current stop symbol is the time saving C big hit symbol (the big hit symbol with the largest number of time saving, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B), step 1778 Then, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value C (100 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1779.

  Next, in step 1779, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1780, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1781, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current stop symbol is the time saving B jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1781, in step 1782, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not after the special game which is won in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state is over. If Yes in step 1782, in step 1783 the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special stage command (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the step 1999 control command transmission processing), and the next processing (step 1997 processing). In this way, in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, when the big hit related to the time saving B big hit symbol on the first main game side is won, the stay stage is set to be the "space stage" (in other big hit symbols, When such a big hit is won, the stay stage is configured to be a "night stage") and is transmitted to the sub side. Even if No in step 1781 or step 1782, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Here, the stay stage is a stage that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect displayed when the stay stage is different (type of notice effect that can be executed, execution. Types of background effects that can be performed, execution frequencies of notice effects that can be executed, execution frequencies of background effects that can be executed, and the like). As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of shortening times after the big hit can be different depending on the big hit symbol, that is, there are a plurality of types of shortening times that can be given. The configuration relating to the number of times saved is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and, for example, is configured to have a plurality of times saved when a non-stochastic variation game state and a time shortened game state are reached after the end of a big hit. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability variation number and the time saving number that are given after the end of the big hit can be configured to be different, and the probability variation number and the time saving number are the same when the time reduction number is less than the probability variation number. There are cases where the number of time saving and saving is greater than the number of probability changing (the number of probability changing and the number of time saving are the maximum number of times that can be continued if the jackpot is not won). Incidentally, the average value of the number of times saved and shortened after the jackpot is “60 × 200/1024 + 80 × 500/1024 + 100 × 324/1024 = 82.42” after the jackpot on the first main game side. After the big hit on the second main game side is “60 × 200/1024 + 100 × 824/1024 = 92.19”, the big hit on the first main game side is after the big hit on the second main game side. It is configured such that the number of time reductions given is relatively greater than that after the end. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that after the big hit on the first main game side, the number of times of shortening given is relatively larger than after the big hit on the second main game side. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the second main game side after the big hit end is relatively easy to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit end on the second main game side. is there. In addition, depending on whether a special game is won in the time-reduced game state or a special game in the non-time-reduced game state, as a configuration having a plurality of time saving times that can be given after the end of the special game (as described above, open It does not matter whether you win the special game while the time extension function is activated or you win the special game when the open time extension function is not activated) Even if the special game is related to the same big hit symbol, the number of hours saved is different. It may be configured to be able to. In such a case, when the special game is won in the time-reduced game state, the number of hours saved after the end of the special game may be set to be larger than the probability variation number (the special game is the first It may be only the special game on the main game side, or may be only the special game on the second main game side). Further, when the special game is won in the non-time shortening game state, it may be configured such that the number of time saving after the end of the special game does not become larger than the number of probability changes (the special game is a special on the first main game side). This may be only the case of the game, or the special game may be only the special game of the second main game side).

Moreover, you may comprise as follows.
(1) Regardless of whether or not the game state selected for the special game is the time-reduced game state, when the special game is the special game on the second main game side, the time saving count is 100 times.
(2) When the special game on the first main game side is won in the time-reduced game state, the number of times saved is 100 times, while the special game on the first main game side is won in the non-time-reduced game state. On the basis of the jackpot pattern relating to the special game, the number of time saving is 60 times, 80 times, or 100 times.
(3) When the special game is won in the time shortening game state, the number of time saving is 100 regardless of the big hit symbol.
(4) The average value of the number of times saved when the special game on the first main game side is won in the time saving game state is the number of times saved when the special game on the second main game side is won in the time saving game state. Greater than average. In such a case, the second main game side is preferentially digested, and "the expected value of the number of prize balls won by the big hit on the first main game side <the expected value of the number of prize balls won by the big hit on the second main game side" When it is configured to be "," it is possible to compensate the disadvantages in the case of winning the big hit on the first main game side in the time shortening game state. In addition, in the gaming machine (so-called ball certain machine) in which the game ball enters the specific area in the special winning opening during the big hit, and the probability variation game state is set after the big hit ends, the "first main game side When the ratio of long open big hit <the ratio of long open big hit on the second main game side ”, the short open big hit is won and the game ball enters the specific area during the short open big hit. If not, the short-time jackpot on the first main game side may be relatively larger than the short-open jackpot on the second main game side. In addition, when the long open big hit on the first main game side is won and the game ball does not enter the specific area during the long open big hit, the shorter open big hit on the second main game side is It may be configured to be more than the number of time saving when the game ball is won in the specific area during the short open big hit. In addition, if the player wins the long open big hit on the second main game side and there is no game ball entering the specific area during the long open big hit, the shorter open big hit on the first main game side It may be configured to be more than the number of time saving when the game ball is won in the specific area during the short open big hit. It should be noted that the long open big hit is a big winning hole in the sorting game execution round during the big hit (the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the round to shift to the probability varying game state after the big hit ends) It is a big hit that makes it easy to enter a specific area by opening it for a relatively long time, and a short open big hit is a sorting game execution round during a big hit (a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the round). This is a big hit that makes it difficult to enter a specific area by opening the big winning opening for a relatively short time in the probability variation game state after the big hit ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22, a control process executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 17 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the game machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received-> RAM on the sub side is initialized, when various information commands are received-> Performance related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub side). After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S first executes a pending information management process, which will be described later, in step 2100, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control processing (transmits the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control section SS side), and terminates this repeating processing routine. To do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2900) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 7C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area of the sub main control section SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new hold occurrence command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is received from the main control substrate M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter (in this example, maximum four for the first main game and maximum four for the second main game). 1 ”is added (incremented). Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the hold information (especially, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, the winning or winning lottery The random number / design lottery random number / variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the pending information related to the symbol variation, and the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. In addition, in the case of No in step 2108, the processing of steps 2110 to 2114 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2116. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12, the second hold display section SG13), hold display lamps of the same number as the drawing hold counter value. Is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7,7,7" etc. , If the symbol is a lost pattern, then a variation such as “1/3/5”} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2308, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2302, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2406, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the mounting variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a variable display command of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). , And proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub sub control unit SS side). To the step 2426.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2418, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the display timing of the advance notice image or reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2422, in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image or reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub-sub-control unit SS side is set). Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 2426. Even if No in step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. If Yes in step 2426, in step 2436, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Be done). Next, in step 2438, the CPU SC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero-clears) the mounting variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol variation flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2500). Even if No in step 2410 or step 2426, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2504, in steps 2506 and 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special game flag and displays the big hit start display on the effect display device SG. Perform (display is appropriately performed based on the type of big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2512. Even if No in step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game performance and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type etc.). Next, in step 2520, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2524, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2520, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stay stage switching timing {for example, the timing when the special game ends (wins), the timing when the game state transitions, (even in the same game state) It is determined whether or not the timing at which the variation mode determination table is switched, the timing at which the number of variations has reached a predetermined number (even in the same gaming state) has been reached}. If Yes in step 2602, in step 2606, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2606, in step 2607, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special stage command (command set in step 1783) from the main side has been received. If Yes in step 2607, in step 2608, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S has different stay stages (types of effect contents, and effects (background effects, notice effects, etc.) that can be executed when the stay stages are different. Then, the "space stage" is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). In this way, in the present embodiment, when the special stage command is received from the main side, that is, when the time saving B big hit symbol is won in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the "space stage" stays. It is configured to be set as a stage.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2607, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in step 2612 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2612, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in step 2616, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state. In the case of Yes in step 2616, in step 2618, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “empty stage” as the stay stage, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). On the other hand, if No in step 2616, that is, if the current game state is the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the game state is also referred to as a normal game state), in step 2620 the sub-control board S The CPUSC of No. 1 sets the "day stage" as the stay stage, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2900). Even if No in step 2602, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900). As described above, in this embodiment, the stay stages are configured to be different depending on the game state, and there are a plurality of stay stages that can be set in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. Also, in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, if you win the time saving B big hit symbol (3A in this example) on the first main game side, stay after the special game related to the time saving B big hit symbol The stage becomes the "space stage" (the game state becomes the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state), while in other cases (especially, the time saving on the first main game side in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state) B) If you win the big hit symbol), the stay stage after the special game will be "night stage" (the game state will be a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state), that is, a special big hit symbol. Even after the game is over, the stay stage after the special game can be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the special game. Also, while the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state can be set to "space stage" and "night stage", the stay stage in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state is "evening stage" The stay stages are different depending on the different game states. Further, the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state is only the "empty stage", and there are fewer types than the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time reducing game state. Further, the stay stage may be configured to be able to transit more than once in the same gaming state. For example, the stay stage in the stochastic variation gaming state is “night stage A” → “night stage B” → “night stage”. It may be configured to make a transition like "C". As described above, the transition trigger may be the arrival of the predetermined number of times of change, the change timing of the change mode determination table, or the like. Specifically, when the symbol variation is executed 20 times in the "night stage A", the stay stage transitions from the "night stage A" to the "night stage B", and the symbol variation occurs in the "night stage B". When it is executed 40 times, the stay stage changes from “night stage B” to “night stage C”. The variation mode determination tables referred to in each stay stage may be the same or different. Further, the stay stage may be configured to transition even in the “evening stage” and the “empty stage”. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the number of transitions is smaller than that in the “night stage”.

  With the above configuration, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured so that the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state can be ended depending on the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game, and the special game. If the symbol fluctuation has passed without winning the special game from the end, if the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state end at the same time, and the probability fluctuation gaming state precedes the time shortened gaming state. By having a case where it ends and a case where the time shortening game state ends before the probability variation game state, it is interesting to transition to various game states depending on the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game. It is possible to configure a high-performance gaming machine. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, various stay stages can be set depending on the gaming state, so that it is possible to achieve a production mode in which the player does not get tired.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the stay stage in the gaming machine in which the probability variation number and the time saving number may be different has been illustrated, but the configuration related to the stay stage is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the stay stage different from that of the present embodiment will be referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 17 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is step 2622 (variation 1), that is, when it is determined in step 2602 that the stay stage switching timing has been reached, in step 2622 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is changed. Determines whether or not the current game state is a time-reduced game state. If Yes in step 2622 (Modification 1), the process moves to step 2607, and if No, the process moves to step 2616. With this configuration, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the stay stages of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are the same. ing. In the first modification from the present embodiment, when the special stage command is received, the stay stage is different from that when the special stage command is not received. The stay stages of the variable game state and the time shortened game state and the non-stochastic variable game state and the time shortened game state may be always the same. Further, in the modified example 1 from the present embodiment, regardless of the big hit symbols, the case of transition to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the big hit and the case of transition to the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state Although the same stay stage was used in the above, the present invention is not limited to this. Only when the number of shortening times given after the end of the big hit is larger than the number of probability changes, the state changes to the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit. The stay stage may be the same in the case and in the case of transitioning to the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state end at the same time as in the present embodiment, and the probability. Various stay stages are set depending on the gaming state in such a configuration that the variable gaming state ends before the time shortened gaming state and the time variation shortened gaming state ends before the stochastic variable gaming state. It is configured so that it can be done, and by being configured so that the same stay stage can be set in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it is an advantageous state or an unfavorable state, and it is possible to proceed with the game while always having a sense of expectation.

(Second embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the stay stage in the gaming machine in which the probability variation number and the time saving number may be different has been illustrated, but the configuration related to the stay stage is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the stay stage different from the present embodiment is referred to as the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are steps 1411-1 (second) to step 1411-4 (second) and step 3200 (second), that is, in step 1410, a stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined. After that, in step 1411-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0. If Yes in step 1411-1 (second), in step 1411-2 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 1411-2 (second), the main game table 3 is referred to in step 1412 to determine the variable time relating to the main game symbol. Even in the case of Yes in step 1411-2 (second), the limited frequency table 5 is referred to only for the five symbol variations, and the main game table 3 is referred to after the five symbol variations are completed. You may comprise. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411-2 (second), in step 1411-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a random number on the main game side, a winning / winning lottery result, a stop symbol for the main game symbol. Based on this, referring to the limited frequency table 4, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1411-1 (second), in step 3200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1414-1 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the count value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1418. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the main game table 3 is not referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol, that is, in the limited frequency state, (1) the limited frequency counter value is 0. There are two cases: a larger case and (2) the limited frequency counter value is 0, and the time reduction game state.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 3200 (second) of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. First, in step 3202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the first stage range (the limited frequency counter value of the first stage in the limited frequency state having four stages). It is within the range, and it is determined whether 80 ≧ G> 75). If Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table 1 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1411-4 (second)}.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3202, in step 3206 the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the second stage range (the second stage in the limited frequency state having four stages). It is within the range of the limited frequency counter value, and it is determined whether or not 75 ≧ G> 1). In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table 2 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1411-4 (second)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in other words, the counter value G of the limited frequency counter MN52c is within the third stage range (within the limited frequency counter value range of the third stage in the limited frequency state having four stages). If G = 1), in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table 3 to change the main game symbol. (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1411-4 (second)}. As described above, in the second embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the state shifts to the limited frequency state, and the limited frequency state is configured to be transitionable in a plurality of stages (3 stages or 4 stages).

  Next, FIG. 26 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 4. First, the limitation frequency table 1 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limitation frequency table 1 is referred to when the limitation frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 75). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the variation time at the time of losing. The limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 3, and the limited frequency table 4 are configured so that the limited frequency table 1 has the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to a similar table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Next, the limitation frequency table 2 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limitation frequency table 2 is referred to when the limitation frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (75 ≧ G> 1). . The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the variation time at the time of losing. It should be noted that, as compared with the limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 3, and the limited frequency table 4, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average variation time is shorter when there are two or three holding balls than when there are zero or one holding balls.

  Next, the limitation frequency table 3 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limitation frequency table 3 is referred to when the limitation frequency counter value G is in a predetermined range (G = 1). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, there is only one type of variable time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3, and it is constant regardless of the winning / nothing lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  Next, the limited frequency table 4 will be described in detail. In the second embodiment, the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (G = 0), and the gaming state is limited to the time shortened gaming state. The frequency table 4 is referred to. Further, the variation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the variation time at the time of losing. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the limited frequency table 4 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  The content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, at a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of holdings (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If not so configured, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holdings, and the second main game side, when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more, the number of holdings It is desirable to configure so that the variation time is relatively shorter than when the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

  In the second embodiment, there are three types or four types of limited frequency tables, and the order is “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3” or “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table”. 2 → limited frequency table 3 → limited frequency table 4 ”is configured to be switched in 3 steps or 4 steps in this order (so-called 3 step ST, 4 step ST), but the invention is not limited to this. Even if the order of the tables to be referred to is changed or the types of the limited frequency tables are only three, there is no problem. Further, as a mode of three-stage ST, it has two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and references tables are switched in the order of limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 1. Good.

Further, in a configuration in which the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) referred to in the probability variation game state (or time shortened game state) transits, the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency table 2 referring to the limited frequency table 1 are displayed. In the case of the limited frequency state B to be referred to,
(1) In the limited frequency state B, the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation that causes a loss when the number of holdings is the first number of holdings (for example, 0), and the number of holdings is the second number of holdings (for example, 3). The difference between the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation and the average value of the predetermined period causes a difference in the average value of the predetermined period.
(2) In the limited frequency state A, the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation that causes a loss when the number of holdings is the first number of holdings (for example, 0), and the number of holdings is the second number of holdings (for example, 3). The difference between the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation and the average value in the predetermined period does not occur.
(3) The second hold number (eg, 3) in the limited frequency state B is most selected, rather than the variation time that causes the most likely loss in the second hold number (eg, 3) in the limited frequency state A. The fluctuation time, which is easily lost, becomes longer.
(4) The limited frequency state B stays longer than the limited frequency state A (the number of fluctuations).
(5) The specific effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency state B is not displayed in the limited frequency state A.
(6) In the time shortening game state, the prefetch effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) There are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency state B, but only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state B is different from the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency state A.
It may be configured as follows. Also, a plurality of these configurations may be combined, or only one may be applied. It should be noted that each limited frequency state only needs to stay for a period in which one or more symbol variations are executed (at least stay for a period in which one symbol variation is executed).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1560 (second), that is, after the main game probability variation flag is turned off in step 1558, in step 1560 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M changes probability. The counter value of the continuous counter MP51c-2 is cleared to zero, and the process proceeds to step 1570. Here, in the second embodiment, a so-called limiter machine that becomes a non-stochastic variation game state after the predetermined number of times of the big hit when the big hit in the probability variation game state continues for a predetermined number of times. Is configured. Therefore, when the probability variation game state ends, the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 for measuring the number of times the jackpot is continuously won in the probability variation game state is configured to be cleared to zero.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) of FIG. 15 in the second embodiment. First, in the second embodiment, the jackpot pattern is only "5A / 5B / 7A / 7B". First, in step 1784-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2. Next, in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 that is a predetermined value (the counter value that will end the probability variation game state when it reaches In the example, it is determined whether or not 4). If Yes in step 1784-3, in step 1784-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1784-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1784-13.

  If No in step 1784-3, in step 1784-6, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Thus, in the second embodiment, by winning the big hit, unless the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value, it is configured to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit (normal game state. Even after the jackpot that was won at will be in a state of random fluctuation game). Next, in step 1784-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the jackpot symbol currently stopped (the jackpot symbol relating to the jackpot that has been finished) is the number-limited probability variable jackpot symbol (after the jackpot, it shifts to the probability variation game state. However, it is a big hit pattern that the number of times saved is 80 times, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A / 5B). In the case of Yes in step 1784-7, in step 1784-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not after the jackpot which has been won in the non-time reduction game state. If Yes in step 1784-8, in step 1784-9, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times in the probability variation counter MP51c (a counter value that does not become 0 until the jackpot is substantially won). Yes, in this example, 65536 times) is set. In the second embodiment, the counter value is set to the probability variation counter MP51c so that the counter value does not become 0 until the big hit is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special game ends. The probability variation game state may be continued until the next jackpot is won when the probability variation game state is entered later (the counter value may not be used). Next, in step 1784-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1784-13. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1784-7 or step 1784-8, in step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times in the probability variation counter MP51c (substantially 0 until the big hit is won). The counter value is set to 65536 times, which may be set to infinite times). Next, at step 1784-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the hour / hour counter MP52c to have a predetermined number B (a counter value that does not become 0 until the jackpot is substantially won. , 65536 times, which may be set to infinite times), and the process proceeds to step 1784-13.

  Next, in step 1784-13, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MN52c (a big hit is won when the counter value remains). If you do, it will be cleared to zero). Next, in step 1784-14, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1784-15, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). As described above, in the second embodiment, a certain number of times B (a counter value that does not become 0 until the big hit is won, 65536 times) is set as the probability variation number counter value, and the probability variation number counter value is set substantially. In addition, the probability variation game state continues until the next big hit, and the limited frequency state (see the limited frequency table 4) is set even after the limited frequency counter value becomes 0. Further, in the second embodiment, when the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are shifted to after the big hit ends, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state substantially continue until the next big hit (65536 times). ) There is a case and the case of ending with a predetermined number of times (80 times) symbol fluctuation, non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and time shortening after the jackpot end Non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and time shortening It is only when the game state ends with a predetermined number (80 times) of symbol fluctuations. In addition, when the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state become after the big hit ends, the probability that the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state substantially continue until the next big hit is after the end of the big hit on the first main game side. The number of jackpots on the second main gaming side after the jackpot is more than that (for example, 40% of the jackpot on the first main gaming side is a jackpot in which the probability varying gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state continue until the next jackpot. And, 60% of the big hit on the second main gaming side is a big hit that the probability variation game state and the time shortened game state continue until the next big hit.) The jackpot that is won by the jackpot is a jackpot in which the probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state continue substantially until the next jackpot after the jackpot that is won in the non-time shortened gaming state (e.g. , 70% of the jackpots won in the time-saving game state are the jackpots in which the probability variation game state and the time-saving game state continue until the next big hit, and 30% of the jackpots won in the non-time-saving game state. Is a big hit in which the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state continue substantially until the next big hit). Further, when the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state substantially continue until the next big hit, the probability variation game state and a predetermined number (80 times in this example) of symbol variation after the big hit ends. When the time shortening game state ends, the variation mode is determined by referring to the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 until the symbol variation for the predetermined number of times is finished, and after the change, it is changed by referring to the limited frequency table 4. Determining the mode, that is, after the jackpot is over, a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) a variation in the probability is caused by a variation in the probability and a predetermined number of variations in the time shortening gaming state The limited frequency tables to be referred to before and after the completion are different from each other. In addition, when the limited frequency table 4 is referred to, the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the reach variation occurs (in this example, in the case of the symbol variation having a variation time of 30 seconds or more, compared to the case where the other tables are referred to. Since the reach variation is executed, the big hit expectation degree when the variation time is 30 seconds or more is relatively high (the variation mode determination tables in which the variation time of 30 seconds or more is not selected are compared. Not). Similarly, the occurrence frequency of the look-ahead effect that causes a loss may be relatively low in the state where the limited frequency table 4 is referred to.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2116 (second) to step 2122 (second), step 2650 (second), step 2700 (second) and step 2750 (second), that is, step 2106. In step 2118 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is the hold of the first main game side after adding 1 to the drawing hold counter value. If Yes in step 2118 (second), in step 2650 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a first main game winning time prefetching process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2120 (second). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2118 (second), in step 2700 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a second main game winning time prefetching process, which will be described later, and in step 2120 (second). Move to.

  Next, in step 2120 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the new hold is a trigger hold. If Yes in step 2120 (second), in step 2750 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a prefetch pending content determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2122 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 2120 (second), the process proceeds to step 2122 (second). Next, in step 2122 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the hold display mode of the hold other than the trigger hold to be "white", and proceeds to step 2116 (second). Next, in step 2116 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the same number of holding display lamps as the drawing holding counter value in the decided holding display mode, and performs the next processing (processing of step 2300). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) of FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. The present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, namely, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former prohibition process of the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S puts a second main game hold (a hold that is consumed in priority over the first main game side) in the hold. Determine if it does not exist. If Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2654, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold having information indicating that the hold is the trigger hold in the hold. Here, the trigger hold is a hold held by winning the winning prefetch lottery (first main game winning prefetch lottery, second main game winning prefetch lottery). If Yes in step 2658, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a big jackpot in the hold before the new hold. If Yes in step 2160, in step 2161, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can digest the new hold in the same game state as the present (the game state shifts by the time the new hold is digested). There is no plan to do it). If Yes in step 2661, the process moves to step 2662. In this way, the prefetch effect on the first main game side is executed in the non-time-reduced game state, and is not executed in the time-reduced game state. The prefetch effect on the second main game side, which will be described later, is executed in the time-reduced game state, and is not executed in the non-time-reduced game state. Because of this configuration, when comparing the pre-reading effect on the first main game side and the pre-reading effect on the second main game side, the pre-reading effect on the first main game side is in the non-time-reduced game state. , The pre-reading effect on the second main game side is compared with the case of the time shortening game state. In addition, in the second embodiment, when the game state transitions at the timing when the new hold is exhausted, the prefetch effect is not executed (the prefetch effect does not cross the game state), in other words, the new hold is performed. It is configured not to be held pending. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and pre-reading pre-reading effects that can be executed across the game state and pre-reading effects that do not cross the game state may be provided. Specifically, it has a pending change prefetching effect (prefetching effect that changes the display mode of the hold) as a prefetching prefetching effect that can be executed across game states, and a background change prefetching as a prefetching effect that does not straddle the gaming state. It may be configured to have an effect (a pre-reading effect in which the background effect changes) (the background change pre-reading effect is provided as a pre-reading pre-reading effect that can be executed across game states, and does not cross over the game state. It may be configured to have a pending change prefetching effect as the prefetching effect). In addition, as the game state when performing the prefetching effect across the game state, when the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state shifts to the non-probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, the game state is straddled. It is possible to execute look-ahead effects, but across game states other than that (for example, probability variation game state and time reduction game state to non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, probability variation game state and time reduction (Problem change from game state to non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state from non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, etc.) You may.

  Next, in the latter prefetch lottery process, first, in step 2662, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning prefetch lottery to win the new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, ⅓), and in step 2674. Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2662, in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S holds the new hold for a long fluctuation (a hold with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is a long fluctuation). Or not. If Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example), and proceeds to step 2674. On the other hand, if No in step 2668, the process moves to step 2674. In addition, in step 2668, it may be configured to determine whether the new hold is a hold corresponding to a reach effect or a hold corresponding to a variation pattern that is an SP reach effect.

  Next, in step 2674, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2674, in step 2676, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily adds and stores information indicating that “trigger hold” is added to the new hold that was won in the winning prefetch lottery. The process proceeds to {process 2120 (second) process}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652 (when the second main game side hold is present in the hold), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is temporarily stored in the RAM of the sub control board S side in step 2678. Delete the information indicating that it is "trigger hold" from the information related to the hold (if the hold having the information indicating that it is trigger hold is not in the hold, this process is not executed and the next process is executed. Process) to the next process {process of step 2120 (second)}. Even if No in step 2654, step 2658, step 2660, step 2661, or step 2674, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2120 (second)}. Incidentally, in the processing of step 2678, when there is a hold (occurrence) on the second main game side, in the game machine of the second main game side priority digestion like the second embodiment, the newly generated second This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is not normally executed because the scheduled fluctuation order is not achieved because the hold on the main game side is consumed first. In this example, when the prefetch effect on the first main game side is executed, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time shortening game state (open time extension function inoperative) Is a condition, and in the non-time shortening game state (during operation of the opening time extension function), the first main game side is mainly configured to proceed with the game. In addition, it may be configured such that a plurality of trigger holds can occur, and hold changes can be performed simultaneously for two or more holds. Further, it is not limited to executing the hold change only at the timing when the trigger hold occurs, and it is configured to execute the hold change during the period from the trigger hold occurring until the trigger hold is exhausted. May be good (for example, when the next fluctuation starts when the trigger hold occurs, while the next fluctuation starts when the trigger hold occurs, when the next fluctuation stops when the trigger hold occurs, when the next fluctuation starts when the trigger hold occurs, when the trigger hold occurs During the subsequent fluctuations that occurred, when the fluctuations stopped after the trigger hold occurred, the timings after the fluctuation stopped after the trigger hold occurred, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. The present process will be described by dividing it into two processes, namely, a process relating to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and a process relating to the prefetch lottery. In the former read-ahead lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2702, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is a time-reduced game state. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger hold is in the hold. If Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a big jackpot in the hold before the new hold. If Yes in step 2706, in step 2707, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can digest the new hold in the same game state as the present (the game state shifts until the new hold is digested). There is no plan to do it). If Yes in step 2707, the process moves to step 2708.

  Next, in the latter process of the prefetch lottery, first, in step 2708, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 2708, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning prefetch lottery for winning a new hold with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3), and then in step 2720. Transition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2708, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S holds the new hold for a long fluctuation (a hold with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more is a long fluctuation). Or not. If Yes in step 2712, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning pre-reading lottery to win the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example), and in step 2720. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process moves to step 2720. In step 2712, it may be configured to determine whether the new hold is a hold corresponding to the reach effect or a change pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect.

  Next, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the winning prefetch lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2720, in step 2722, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds the information indicating that it is “trigger hold” to the new hold held in the winning prefetch lottery, and temporarily stores it. The process proceeds to the process {process of step 2120 (second)}. Even if No in step 2702, step 2704, step 2706, step 2707, or step 2220, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2120 (second)}. In this way, in the second embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the second main game side prefetch lottery can be won, while the first main game side prefetch lottery is not won. In the time reduction game state, the first main game side prefetch lottery can be won, while the second main game side prefetch lottery is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the state where the opening time of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d is relatively extended (the opening time extension function is operating), the second main game. A state in which the player can win the prefetch lottery on the one side but not the prefetch lottery on the first main game side, and the opening time of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is not relatively extended (opening time extension function May be won in the prefetch lottery on the first main game side, while not winning in the prefetch lottery on the second main game side. Also, in the description according to the present example, when the configuration that has different actions in the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state is illustrated, the state where the opening time extension function is activated and the opening time extension function is activated There is no problem even if it is replaced with a configuration that has a different action depending on whether it is not done. In this example, as described above, when the prefetch effect on the first main game side is executed, there is no hold on the second main game side and the non-time reduction game state (open time extension function It is a condition that it is an operation), and in a non-time reduction game state (open time extension function non-operation), it is configured to advance the game mainly on the first main game side. Also, when executing the prefetch effect on the second main game side, it is a condition that it is in the time shortening game state (while the opening time extension function is in operation), and the time reduction game state (release time extension function) During operation), the game is mainly configured to proceed on the second main game side. Since it is configured in this way, when comparing the look-ahead effect in the time shortened game state (during operation of the open time extension function) and the look-ahead effect in non-time shortened game state (operation of the open time extension function), Pre-reading effect (or matters related to pre-reading such as pre-reading lottery) on the second main game side in the shortened game state (while the open time extension function is operating) and the first main game in the non-time shortened game state (open time extension function is activated) The pre-reading effect on the side (or items related to pre-reading such as pre-reading lottery) may be compared.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the prefetch pending content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) of FIG. 29 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the trigger hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the display mode of the b trigger hold with reference to the hold display form determination table (at the time of big hit), and the next process {step 2122 ( 2))}. On the other hand, if No in step 2752, in step 2758 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), and the next process {step 2122 (Second)}.

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the second embodiment, the type of the display mode that can be selected when the display mode of the trigger hold mode that can change during execution of the hold change effect is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is “rainbow color”. , “Red”, “green”, and “blue”, and the types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing) are “red”, “red”, There are three colors, “green” and “blue”, and the lottery is performed by a random number dedicated to determining the hold display mode. It should be noted that "red" is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), while "blue" is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). , The jackpot expectation degree for each hold display mode when the hold change effect occurs (the ratio of the appearance rate of the jackpot variation to the total appearance rate of the variation that becomes the jackpot and the variation that loses) is "Color" is selected only at the time of a big hit, and in the colors excluding "rainbow", the order of "red", "green", and "blue" is in descending order of the expectation of a big hit. The display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the types that can be changed are changed or the colors that can be changed are changed. For example, when the opening extension function is not activated than when the opening extension function is activated, The number of types of the hold display mode may be larger (or in the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time reduction game state than in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state). Further, the configuration is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the selection ratio of the hold display mode is changed. For example, in the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), “red: blue” = “300: 324”. , In the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), “red: blue” = “100: 624” is set so that “blue” is easier to select than “red” regardless of the result of winning or losing, but at the time of a big hit. The difference between the selection ratio of the hold display mode and the difference of the selection ratio of the hold display mode at the time of losing may be configured so that the difference at the time of loss becomes larger. Further, in this example, the display color of the hold is configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the symbol variation related to the trigger hold will be a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in the case of a big hit (or, It may be configured so as to suggest the game state after the execution of the special game, together with the expectation of being a big hit. In such a case, especially in the probability variation game state, the display color of the hold suggests the degree of expectation of transition to the probability change game state after execution of the special game when a big hit occurs in the hold. (For example, if the pending display color is "red", the probability change probability is high, if it is "blue", the probability change probability is low, etc.) Is the probability variation game state advantageous for the player continued? It is possible to execute an effective production that fuels whether or not to end.

  In addition, in this example, the hold display mode is configured to be displayed in a display color other than “white” at the timing when the trigger hold occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a notice is displayed as a hold change effect. The effect may be executed and the hold display mode may be changed (for example, the character causes an action on the effect display device SG and the display mode of the trigger hold changes from “white” to “blue”). . The holding change effect may be executed at various timings such as a symbol variation start timing, a symbol variation end timing, a timing during symbol variation, and the like.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time of executing the hold change effect (in this example, when the trigger hold occurs), the jackpot expectation degree is determined by the display mode selected from a plurality of types of hold display modes. It is configured to be different. Further, it may be configured such that the hold change effect can be executed a plurality of times for a certain hold during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing of winning the look-ahead lottery to the end of variation of the main game symbol related to trigger hold). . With such a configuration, for example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the prefetch effect, when the hold display mode that changes in the first hold change effect is “blue”, The display mode of the hold changed in the second hold change effect is set to "green" or "red", that is, the hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation is changed every time the hold change effect is executed. It is desirable to configure (ranking up) (in order not to spoil the player's expectation). Further, the effect related to the hold display change is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not accompany the hold display change may be provided, and for example, the hold quivers when the fluctuation starts (or when the hold is exhausted). It is possible to provide an effect mode (so-called gaze pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  In the second embodiment, the pending change effect is configured to be executable in both the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, that is, common. The prefetch effect is configured to be executable. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, the prefetch effect that can be executed in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, but is not executed in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and the non-probability variation game state and time reduction game. A look-ahead effect that may be executed in the state but is not executed in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state may be provided. Further, a pre-reading effect A is provided as a pre-reading effect that can be executed in a plurality of different game states or a pre-reading effect that can be executed across a plurality of different game states, and a pre-reading effect that cannot be executed in a plurality of different game states or different When the prefetch effect B is provided as a prefetch effect that cannot be executed across a plurality of game states, (1) the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are the same stay. It is a stage, (2) the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the prefetching effect A is different, (3) the big hit expectation degree of the prefetching effect A is different, (4) the occurrence rate of the prefetching effect A that is a difference is different , May be configured. Incidentally, when the prefetch effect is executed in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, it is the prefetch effect related to the second main game side. At least one or more configurations may be applied to the configurations (1) to (4).

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in step 2661 of FIG. 30 and step 2707 of FIG. 31 described above, the game state at the time when the newly generated hold is digested and the time when the new hold is generated The game state is different (for example, the occurrence of the new hold is a probability variation game state and the time is shortened, and the game state when the new hold is digested is a non-probability variation game state and the time is shortened. In the game state), the trigger hold does not occur, that is, the prefetch effect is not executed across the game state. Note that the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and as described above, the pre-reading effect A is provided as the pre-reading effect that can be executed in a plurality of different game states or the pre-reading effect that can be executed across a plurality of different game states. The prefetching effect B may be provided as a prefetching effect that cannot be executed in a plurality of different game states or as a prefetching effect that cannot be executed across a plurality of different game states.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 17 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2622 (second), that is, when the stay stage switching timing is reached in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is currently in step 2622 (second). It is determined whether or not the game state is the time shortening game state. In the case of Yes in step 2622 (second), the "night stage" is set as the stay stage in step 2610, and in the case of No, the process of setting the stay stage in the non-time reduction game state is performed in the process of step 2616 and thereafter. Run. As described above, in the second embodiment, the same stay stage “night stage” is set in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. There is. The gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a non-probability variation gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot of the predetermined number of times has been completed if the jackpot won in the probability variation gaming state continues a predetermined number of times (three times in this example). Since it is configured to shift to, by recognizing that it shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state and a time reduction game state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state It is hard to be discouraged, and it is configured to maintain a higher expectation. In addition, in the second embodiment, the stay stage is configured to be the “night stage” in the time shortening game state, but the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state is the “night stage”. , The star is displayed, the stay stage in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state is the “night stage” and the star is not displayed, and so on. Alternatively, the display mode may be different depending on whether it is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, even in the gaming machine having various stay stages, even when the prefetching effect is configured to be executable, It is configured to be able to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect corresponding to switching, and if the jackpot that is won in the probability variation game state continues for a predetermined number of times, a non-stochastic variation game state and time shortening game state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpots. Even when configured to shift to, the probability staying game state and the time shortening game state and the non-stochastic changing game state and the time shortening game state are in the same stay stage, which is advantageous and disadvantageous to the player. By making it difficult to distinguish the state from the game state, it is possible to provide a game play that does not make the player tired.

  In the second embodiment, the same limited frequency is used in both the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the jackpot. Since the state is brought into the state, the timing at which the limited frequency table to be referred to is switched (limited frequency transition timing) is the same. The limited frequency tables referred to in such a case may be the same, but different limited frequency tables may be referred to in order to make the reach production occurrence frequencies different.

  In the present example, the prefetch effect may be configured to be executable even during the big hit execution. For example, when there is a big hit hold at the predetermined hold during the big hit execution. In the above, an effect (so-called in-hold condominium effect) for notifying the player that there is a big hit hold in the hold may be executed. In addition, it may be configured such that the production in the holding condominium production can be executed even during the big hit which is won in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. It can be executed even during the big hit.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In addition, in the second embodiment, the game machine has a variation in the variation mode of the main game symbol by being configured so as to be able to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the special game. However, in the second embodiment, The gaming machine having such a limited frequency state is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having a limited frequency state different from that of the second embodiment will be referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  The modified example 1 from the second embodiment has a limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 and a limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 as limited frequency counters.

  First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process relating to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 6 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1440 (second variation 1) to step 1443 (second variation 1), step 3300 (second variation 1) and step 3350 (second variation 1), that is, After determining the stop symbol regarding the main game symbol in step 1410, in step 1440 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is 0. To do. If Yes in step 1440 (second variation 1), in step 1441 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is 0 or not. . In the case of Yes in step 1441 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1412 to refer to the main game table 3 to determine the variation mode regarding the main game symbol.

  If No in step 1440 (second variation 1), in step 3300 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. If No in step 1441 (second variation 1), in step 3350 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1443 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 by 1, and proceeds to step 1418. Although details will be described later, the first modification from the second embodiment has a plurality of limited frequency states.

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (second variation 1) of FIG. 34 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the first stage range (the limited frequency counter being the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is within the range of the counter value of A, and it is determined whether or not 100 ≧ GA> 20). If Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table A1 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process 1442 (second variation 1)}.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3302, in step 3306, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the second stage range (2 in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter A, which is the stage, and 20 ≧ GA> 1). If Yes in step 3306, in step 3308, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A2 based on the random number on the main game side, the result of the lottery, the number of holdings, and the variation mode regarding the main game symbol ( (Variation time) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process 1442 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3306, in other words, the counter value GA of the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1 is within the third stage range (of the limited frequency counter A which is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value and GA = 1), in step 3310, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A3 based on the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery. The variation mode (variation time) relating to the game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {process 1442 (second variation 1)}.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (second variation 1) of FIG. 34 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the first stage range (the first stage of the limited frequency counter in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is within the range of the counter value of B, and it is determined whether 80 ≧ GB> 21). If Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table B1 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3352, in step 3356, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the second stage range (2 in the limited frequency state having 3 stages). It is determined whether it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency counter B at the stage and GB = 21). In the case of Yes in step 3356, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table B2 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1443 (second variation 1)}. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3356, in other words, the counter value GB of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 is within the third stage range (of the limited frequency counter B which is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value and GB ≦ 20), in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B3 based on the random number on the main game side, the result of the lottery, and the number of holdings. Then, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 1443 (second variation 1)}. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, there are two types of limited frequency states (a limited frequency state A in which the limited frequency counter A is subtracted and a limited frequency state B in which the limited frequency counter B is subtracted. ), And when the limited frequency states are different, the timing of switching the limited frequency table to be referenced (limited frequency transition timing) is different.

  Next, FIG. 37 is an example of the limited frequency tables A1 to A3 and B1 to B3 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, the limited frequency table A1 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 1 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table A2 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 2 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table A3 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 3 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B1 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 1 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B2 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 3 in the second embodiment. Next, the limited frequency table B3 has the same configuration as the limited frequency table 2 in the second embodiment. The table contents related to the gaming state will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second variation 1) of FIG. 15 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1785-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1785-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the big hit symbol currently stopped is a long, short, and large number of big hit symbols (a big hit symbol with a relatively large number of time and short numbers to be given, in this example, 7A.・ 7B) is determined. If Yes in step 1785-4, in step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long / short time counter MP52c to a long / short time count (a relatively large time / short time count, 100 times in this example). To do. Next, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1, and proceeds to step 1785-10. The limited frequency counter value is configured to be cleared to zero when the special game is won.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1785-4, in other words, the big hit symbol in the stop is a short time short times big hit symbol (a big hit symbol with a relatively small number of times shortened and given, 5A / 5B in this example). If there is, in step 1785-8, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the short time count counter MP52c to a short time count (60 times in this example). Next, in step 1785-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2, and proceeds to step 1785-10. The limited frequency counter value is configured to be cleared to zero when the special game is won. Next, in step 1785-10 and step 1785-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and the main game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1997). In the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, depending on the type of big hit symbol or according to the gaming state (whether the opening time extension function is activated or not) when the big hit occurs, or the big hit on the first main game side is won. Alternatively, the tendency of the limited frequency state after the big hit may be different depending on whether or not the big hit on the second main game side is won. In such a case, the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state In the case of having B and B, it may be determined whether to be the limited frequency state A or the limited frequency state B, and it may be determined which of the limited frequency state A and the limited frequency state B is likely to occur (for example, , The second main game side or the time shortened game state is more likely to shift to the limited frequency state in which the number of times saved is shorter).

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the number of shortening times given after the end of the big hit relating to the big hit design is different depending on the big hit design. Further, when the number of shortening times is larger than the number of probability changing times, a predetermined value is set in the limited frequency counter AMN52c-1, that is, the limited frequency state A is entered, and the number of shortening times is smaller than the number of probability changing times. In this case, the limited frequency counter BMN52c-1 is set to a predetermined value, that is, the limited frequency state B is entered.

  By configuring as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, it is configured to have a plurality of types of limited frequency states and transition modes of limited frequency states, and by the big hit symbol, By changing the transition mode of the limited frequency state and the limited frequency state after the end of the big hit, the gaming machine can be made more interesting. Further, like the configuration of the present embodiment, the probability variation number and the time reduction number may be configured to be different, and there are cases where the time reduction number is less than the probability variation number and the time reduction number is greater than the probability variation number depending on the jackpot pattern. With such a configuration, and by configuring the limited frequency state and the transition mode of the limited frequency state to be different in the two cases, the enjoyment of the game is further enhanced.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the time saving number is larger than the probability changing number, the limited frequency transition number in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (the number of times the limited frequency table is referred to is switched) ) Is once, while the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time-reduced game state is two, which is less than the limited frequency transition number in the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state. The number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state is larger. When the number of times saved is less than the number of probability changes, the number of limited frequency transitions (the number of times to switch the limited frequency table to be referenced) in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is one, while the non-stochastic variation game The number of times of the limited frequency transition in the state and the time-reduced gaming state is 0 times (there is no such gaming state), and the probability variation is less than the frequency of the limited frequency transition in the gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state. The number of limited frequency transitions in the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is smaller. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the number of limited frequency transitions in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state is always larger than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. The number of limited frequency transitions in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state is smaller than the number of limited frequency transitions in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. You may. The limited frequency transition in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the limited frequency transition in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are not limited to only the limited frequency number, for example, , Configured so that the number of times of transition to a limited frequency state in which the occurrence frequency of reach variation (for example, a symbol variation having a variation time of 30 seconds or more) is different and the period of staying in a limited frequency state in which the frequency of reach variation is high are different You may.

  Further, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the probability variation game state and the time variation game state final variation (the 60th variation after the jackpot end) are all 5 seconds variation when the time saving number is less than the probability variation number. Whereas the time is selected, the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (the 60th fluctuation after the jackpot end) is selected from 1 second or 3 seconds when the number of time saving is greater than the number of probability variation. It is configured so that the time variation of the final variation in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state (the average value of the selected variation time) is different depending on whether the number of time saving is smaller or smaller than the number of probability variation. Is configured. Incidentally, the difference in the final variation of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is not limited to this, and the case where the number of time saving times is greater than or less than the probability variation number is not limited to this. Whether it is possible to make a difference depending on the number of holdings, (2) whether or not to execute the effect of inspiring the player as to whether or not the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state are over, (3) selected The longest variation time to be obtained may be different, or (4) the shortest time that can be selected may be different.

  Further, in the second embodiment and the modification example 1 from the second embodiment, the distribution game execution round in the special game execution (when the game ball enters the specific area C22, the probability variation game state is set after the special game ends. A game ball may enter the specific area C22 in a round to be changed to a probability variation game state after the end of the special game (so-called ball confirmation machine).

  In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the limited frequency transition number is configured to be different depending on whether the time saving number is larger or smaller than the probability variation number in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence frequency of reach fluctuation, the appearance rate of fluctuation time that is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, the appearance rate of fluctuation time that is equal to or shorter than a predetermined time, and the like may be different. In, (1) apply only to the second main game side, (2) apply only to the symbol variation that will be lost, (3) apply only to the symbol variation that is the second main game side and lose You may. Further, the above-mentioned limitations (1) to (3) are not limited to the comparison between the case where the number of time saving times is larger than the number of probability variation times and the case where the number is shorter than the probability variation times, and the variation in all the embodiments shown in the present example. It should be supplemented that the limitations of (1) to (3) may be applied to the comparison of modes (fluctuation time, fluctuation tendency) and the comparison of effect modes (effect tendency).

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the first modification from the second embodiment.
(1) The variation mode determination table referenced in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the variation mode determination table referenced in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are configured in the same table contents.
(2) The variation mode determination table referenced in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the variation mode determination table referenced in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are configured with different table contents.

(Third Embodiment)
In addition, in the present embodiment, by having a plurality of types of time saving times after the end of the special game, it is configured to enhance the interest in the time-reduced game state. It is not limited only to the configuration of form. Therefore, the configuration of the time reduction game state different from that of the present embodiment will be referred to as the third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 39 is a drawing showing the basic structure on the front side of the gaming machine in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the third embodiment, two first main game starting openings, that is, a first main game starting opening AA10 in the center of the game area and a first main game starting opening BA12 on the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area). Is provided. In addition, the game ball that the player executes leftward and flows down the left side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is likely to be guided to the first main game starting opening AA10, and is difficult to be guided to other entrances. The game balls that are configured as described above and flow down the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) by the player performing right hitting are the distribution entrance C20, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first main. The game starting opening BA12, the auxiliary game starting opening H10, and the special winning opening C10 are easily guided, and the first main game starting opening AA10 is less likely to be guided. Furthermore, the game ball that the player executes rightward and flows down the right side of the game area (based on the center of the game area) is the distribution entrance ball opening C20, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first main game starting opening BA12. The auxiliary game starting opening H10 and the special winning opening C10 are configured to flow down in this order. Further, the first non-electric accessory A12hd is provided in the first main game starting opening BA12, and when the first non-electric accessory A12hd is in the closed state, the game ball is in the first main game starting opening BA12. It is difficult to enter the ball, and when the first non-electric accessory A12hd is in the open state, the game ball is easily inserted into the first main game starting opening BA12. Further, the second main game starting opening B10 is provided with a second non-electric accessory B10hd, and when the second non-electric accessory B10hd is in the closed state, the game ball is the second main game starting opening B10. It is difficult to enter the ball, and when the second non-electric accessory B10hd is in the open state, the game ball is easily inserted into the second main game starting opening B10. It should be noted that "easy to guide" and "difficult to guide" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively. In the third embodiment, only one special winning opening is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two special winning openings may be provided. Incidentally, as the flow of the game of the third embodiment, in the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortened game state, it is a left-handed (a game method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game board surface) , A game ball is shot with a relatively weak firing strength), and the game progresses, and other game states (probability variation game state and time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state) In, it is configured to proceed with the game by right-handing (it is a game method that shoots a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game board, and the game ball is shot with a relatively high launch strength) Has been done.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the distribution entrance C20 according to the third embodiment. Inside the distribution entrance C20, the first non-electric accessory A12hd is opened by entering a game ball. The first opening entrance C22 (first opening entrance detecting device) C22s), the second non-electric accessory B10hd is opened by entering the game ball, and the second opening entrance C23 (second opening entrance entrance detection device C23s), and sorting It has a distribution member C24 that distributes the game balls that have entered the ball opening C20 to the first open ball entrance C22 and the second open ball entrance C23.

  First, to explain the operation of the upper part of the figure in detail, when the distribution member C24 is in the first mode, it is in a state of being swayed to the right side so as to block the flow path to the second opening entrance C23. The game ball that has entered the distribution entrance C20 is configured to easily enter the first open entrance C22 and difficult to enter the second open entrance C23. Next, the operation of the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. When the distribution member C24 is in the second mode, it is in a state of being swung to the left side so as to close the flow path to the first opening entrance C22. The game balls that have entered the distribution entrance C20 are hard to enter the first opening entrance C22 and are easy to enter into the second opening entrance C23. Further, as will be described later, the distribution member is configured to start driving from the first opening timing when the electric accessory D10d is opened, and to be driven as in "first aspect → second aspect → first aspect". Has been done.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main game board M according to the third embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is step 1800 (third) to step 1900 (third) in the timer interruption process, that is, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the special game control. After executing the processing, in step 1800 (third), the distribution member drive control processing, which will be described later, is executed. Next, in step 1850 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a first non-electric auditors product drive control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1900 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a second non-electric auditors product drive control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is the content of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table, that is, the opening mode of the electric auditors, in the third embodiment, as the auxiliary game short time flag, the auxiliary game short time flag Two types of auxiliary game time saving flags, A and auxiliary game time saving flag B, are provided. Further, depending on the type of the auxiliary game time saving flag that is turned on, the opening mode of the auxiliary game electric accessory D10d is configured to differ, and by configuring in this manner, the auxiliary game time saving flag that is turned on. By this, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution ball entrance C20 can be different, and the game ball can be placed in the first open entrance C22 and the second open entrance C23 in accordance with the driving of the distribution member C24. Is configured to be allocable (details will be described later). Specifically, when the auxiliary game shortening flag A is on, the opening mode of the electric accessory D10d is "3.0 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds opened → 0.2 seconds closed → It has become "0.2 seconds open → closed", and the opening of 3.0 seconds (long open) that makes it easy for game balls to enter is the first half of the opening period. When the auxiliary game shortened flag B is ON, the opening mode of the electric accessory D10d is "0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds opened → 3.0 seconds closed → 4. It is "0 seconds open", and the opening of 4.0 seconds (long opening), which makes it easier for game balls to enter, is the latter half of the opening period. The long open period is longer when the auxiliary game shorter time flag A is on than when the auxiliary game shorter time flag A is on, and the total opening time is shorter than the auxiliary game shorter time. It is longer when the auxiliary game shortened flag B is on than when the flag A is on. At the same time, the driving mode of the distribution member C24 is “3.6 seconds first mode (guided to the first opening entrance C22) → 4.0 seconds second mode (guided to the second opening entrance C23)”. Has become. With this configuration, when the auxiliary game short time flag A is on, the ball enters the first opening entrance C22, and when the auxiliary game short flag B is on, enters the second opening entrance C22. Is configured to. In this example, when the auxiliary game short-time flag (the auxiliary game short-time flag A and the auxiliary game short-time flag B) is off, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side may be 0 (no winning). In such a case, a random number for determining the auxiliary game variation time may be obtained, and the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol may be determined based on the random number. In addition, the candidate of the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is in the same auxiliary game side game state (auxiliary game shorter time flag A on, auxiliary game shorter time flag B on, auxiliary game shorter time flag A and auxiliary game shorter time flag B off). It may be configured to have a plurality, or may be configured to have only one candidate of the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol in the game state of all the auxiliary game sides. In such a case, the auxiliary game variation time determining random number may not be provided.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display device according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 10 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3150 (third), that is, after the changing flag is turned off in step 1434, in step 3150 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M will be described later. The promotion count control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the promotion count control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (third) of FIG. 43 in the third embodiment. First, in step 3152, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol relating to the current main game symbol is the jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag. Next, in step 3156, the CPU MC of the main control board M conceals that it is in the probability variation game state in the period from the end of the special game until the predetermined number of symbol variations elapse from the end of the special game, and the predetermined number. In order to inform that it is a probability variation game state at the timing when the number of symbol variations has elapsed, a counter for measuring the predetermined number of symbol variations) is cleared to zero. Next, in step 3158, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the promotion count flag (the flag that executes the measurement of the promotion counter described above when it is on), and proceeds to step 3160. On the other hand, if No in step 3152, the process moves to step 3160.

  Next, in step 3160, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the promotion count flag (which is a flag turned on in step 1764) is turned on. If Yes in step 3160, then in step 3162, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds 1 to the stage promotion counter. Next, in step 3164, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stage promotion counter value is the same as the number of hours saved after the big hit according to the stage switching value {non-probability variation big hit symbol (2A / 2B), this example. Then, it is determined whether it is 10}. If Yes in step 3164, in step 3166, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a stage promotion command (transmitted to the sub-main controller SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the next process The process proceeds to (processing of step 1550). Even if No in step 3160 or step 3164, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 43 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 1569 (third) and step 1578 (third), that is, in step 1569 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag. Or not. If Yes in step 1569 (third), the process proceeds to step 1570, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Further, in step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game short time flag, and then in step 1578 (third), the auxiliary game short time flag (auxiliary game short time flag A / auxiliary game short time flag B). Is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). In this way, in the third embodiment, if the probability variation game state is transitioned to after the special game ends, the probability variation game state can be maintained until the next big hit is won (elapse of the number of symbol variations). Due to the probability variation game state does not end).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1604 (third), that is, when the condition device operation flag is on in step 1602, in step 1604 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is Turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game short time flag, auxiliary game short time flag A, auxiliary game short time flag B), and shifts to step 1606.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the specific game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 15 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a probability variation jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol which will be shifted to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, 3A, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag, and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, if No in step 1752 (when the stop symbol is 2A or 2B), the process proceeds to step 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a time saving A big hit symbol (a big hit symbol in which the auxiliary game time shortening flag A is turned on after the end of the special game, 3A). Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1756, in step 1758 the auxiliary game time saving flag A is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1768. If No in step 1756, in step 1760, the CPU MC of the main control board M indicates that the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a short-time B big hit symbol (the auxiliary game time-shortening flag B is turned on after the special game is a big hit symbol. 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1760, in step 1762, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag B. As described above, in the third embodiment, depending on the stopped big hit symbol, the auxiliary game time shortened flag which is turned on after the special game related to the big hit symbol can be different (the auxiliary game time shortened flag A and the auxiliary game time shortened flag B). Any one of them is turned on), that is, the time shortening game state can be different. In addition, hereinafter, a state in which the auxiliary game time saving flag A is on may be referred to as a time reduction game state A, and a state in which the auxiliary game time saving flag B is on may be referred to as a time reduction game state B. Next, in step 1763, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol to return to the jackpot symbol (after the end of the special game, the probability variation game state will be entered, but a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game. It is a big hit symbol that keeps the probability variation game state secret to the player until the symbol variation elapses, and it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B). If Yes in step 1763, in step 1764, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the promotion count flag (a flag for measuring the number of fluctuations from the end of the special game which is referred when changing the stay stage). And shifts to step 1768. On the other hand, if No in step 1763, the process moves to step 1768. Further, in the case of No in step 1760 (when the stop symbol is 2A, 2B), in step 1765, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (10 in this example) to the hour / hour counter. Next, in step 1766, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag B, and proceeds to step 1768. In addition, in two states, that is, the case where the promotion count flag is turned on in step 1764 and the case where the predetermined value (10 times in this example) is set in the time saving counter MP52c in step 1765, the same after the special game is finished. As an effect, it is configured to execute an effect to the player to check whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state. Here, if the opening state of the electric accessory differs between the two states, the player will determine whether or not the current probability variation game state is present regardless of the result of the effect. In order to prevent such a situation, the third embodiment is configured to turn on the auxiliary game shortened flag B in any of the two states. Next, in step 1768, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1800 (third)}. In this way, in the third embodiment, whether the auxiliary game time saving flag A is turned on or the auxiliary game time saving flag B is turned on as the auxiliary game time saving flag (whether it is the time shortening game state A or the time shortening game state B). It is configured to be determined by the type of big hit symbol (does not depend on the game state at the time of winning the big hit), depending on the type of big hit symbol, when changing to the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state A , There is a case of shifting to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state B, and a case of transition to the non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state B. In this example, the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state B are configured after the big hit related to "2A / 2B" which is a big hit symbol that becomes the non-stochastic variation game state after the big hit ends, After the jackpot related to "2A / 2B", the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state A may be set. It should be noted that the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state A may be configured even after the jackpot related to "5A / 5B" is completed.

  In the third embodiment, the rate at which the auxiliary game time saving flag B is turned on after the special game is finished, in other words, the rate at which the time shortening game state B is finished after the special game is finished is the special game on the first main game side. After that is "524/1024", after the special game on the second main game side is "1024/1024", after the special game on the second main game side is the special game on the first main game side. It is configured such that the ratio of being in the time-reduced game state B is higher than that after the end (in addition, the time-reduced game after the special game on the second main game side is completed than after the special game on the first main game side is completed. If the ratio of the state A is configured to be low), in other words, after the end of the special game on the second main game side transitions to a shorter time game state than after the end of the special game on the first main game side In, in the time reduction game state B is high Ratio is a time reduction gaming state A is low) as configuration. The ratio of the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state B after the special game is "324/1024" after the special game on the first main game side is finished and after the special game on the second main game side is finished. Is "824/1024", and is configured such that the ratio of the time shortened gaming state B after the special game on the second main game side is higher than that after the special game on the first main game side. The number of big hit execution rounds in the third embodiment is the same as that in the present embodiment, and "2R / 5B" is "2R", "2A / 3A / 5A / 7A" is "4R", and "7B" is "7R". 16R ”. The average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot on the first main game side is “2R × 200/1024 + 4R × 824/1024 = 3.61R”, and the average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot on the second main game side is Since “2R × 200/1024 + 4R × 50/1024 + 16R × 774/1024 = 12.67R” is set, the average value of the number of execution rounds for the big hit on the second main game side is larger than the big hit on the first main game side. Is increasing, that is, the expected value of the number of winning prize balls in the jackpot is increasing. Further, when similarly comparing the probability variation big hits which are to be changed to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends, the average value of the number of execution rounds in the probability variation big hits on the first main game side is “4R × 824/824 = 4R”. Yes, since the average value of the number of execution rounds in the big jackpot on the second main game side is “4R × 50/824 + 16R × 774/824 = 15.3R”, it is the second big jackpot than the big jackpot on the first main game side. The average value of the number of execution rounds is larger in the big hit on the main game side, that is, the expected value of the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit is larger. In addition, when the same comparison is performed with respect to the probability variation jackpot that will be transferred to the non-probability variation game state after the jackpot, the average value of the number of execution rounds in the probability variation jackpot on the first main game side is “4R × 200/200 = 4R”. Since the average value of the number of execution rounds in the jackpot on the second main game side is “2R × 200/200 = 2R”, the jackpot on the second main game side is larger than the jackpot on the first main game side. Has a smaller average value of the number of execution rounds, that is, an expected value of the number of winning prize balls in the big hit is smaller. Further, among the big hits on the first main game side, there are big hits that shift to the time shortening game state A and big hits that shift to the time shortening game state B as big hits that shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends. On the other hand, among the big hits on the second main game side, as the big hits that shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends, there are only big hits that shift to the time shortening game state B.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution member drive control processing in the subroutine of step 1800 (third) in FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution member driving flag (a flag that is turned on while the distribution member is driven based on the opening of the electric accessory) is off. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the first opening timing of the electric accessory (the driving of the distribution member is started from the timing when the electric accessory first opens). Be performed). If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the initial value (7.6 in this example) to the distribution member drive timer (decrement timer) and starts. Next, in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to step 1810. Even if No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M has the distribution member drive timer value reaching the drive switching timing (timer value = 4.0) (the distribution member drive timer becomes a decrement timer. Therefore, the distribution member drive timer value at the timing of 3.6 seconds from the start of driving the distribution member is 4.0). If Yes in step 1810, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the first mode to the second mode (the initial position is the first mode), and the next process { Step 1850 (third process)}. If No in step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 1814 whether the distribution member drive timer value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the second mode to the first mode. Next, in step 1818, the CPU MC of the main control substrate M turns off the sorting member driving flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1850 (third)}. Even if No in step 1804 or 1814, the process shifts to the next process {process of step 1850 (third)}.

  Next, the middle part of FIG. 48 is an operation diagram of the electric accessory and the distribution member. First, the distribution member C22 is driven from the first mode (initial position) to the second mode at a predetermined timing (3.6 seconds from the start of driving). Here, in the time shortening game state A, the electric member is opened long during the period in which the distribution member is the first mode (3.0 seconds which is the first half of the opening period of the electric member described above). Open), it becomes easy to enter the game ball. On the other hand, in the time shortening game state B, the electric accessory is opened long during the period in which the distribution member is in the second mode (4.0 seconds which is the latter half of the above-mentioned electric accessory open period). Open), it is configured to facilitate the entry of game balls. Further, the lower part of FIG. 48 is a table showing the opening mode of the electric accessory and the displacing mode of the distribution member. As described above, the opening pattern of the electric accessory is such that when the auxiliary game short time flag B is on, the total opening time of the electric auditory product or (the plural open) is made more than when the auxiliary game short time flag A is on. The maximum opening time is longer and the auxiliary game shorter time flag B is relatively ON than the case when the auxiliary game shorter time flag A is ON. It is easy to enter the ball. As described above, in the case of the first aspect, the distribution member guides the game ball to enter the first open entrance C22 (performs a lottery related to the first main game symbol), In the case of the second mode, the game ball is guided so as to enter the second opening entrance C23 (perform a lottery related to the second main game symbol). With such a configuration, even in one probability variation game state, depending on whether the time-reduced game state is the time-reduced game state A or the time-reduced game state B, different game states such as game characteristics and profit margins can be achieved. It is possible to have a plurality.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first non-electric auditors product drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (third) of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first non-electric auditors accessory opening flag (a flag that is turned on while the first non-electric auditors accessory A12hd is opened) is off. . If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first opening entrance C22. If Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the first non-electric auditors open flag. Next, in step 1858, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the first non-electric accessory A12hd, and shifts to the next process {process of step 1900 (third)}. Further, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1860, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a predetermined number (the number of balls to be closed by the first non-electric accessory A12hd) in the first main game starting opening BA12. , 2 in this example) is determined. If Yes in step 1860, in step 1862, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (in this example, the first non-electric accessory is in a situation where the auxiliary game shortened flag A is off). It is determined whether or not A12hd is opened and an error occurs when the auxiliary game shortened flag A is off at the timing when Yes is obtained in step 1860). If Yes in step 1862, in step 1864, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the first non-electric accessory A12hd. Next, in step 1866, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first non-electric auditors accessory open flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1900 (third)}. Even if No in step 1860 or step 1854, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1900 (third)). In addition, in the case of No in step 1862, in step 1868, it is notified that an error has occurred, and error processing is executed (error recovery conditions include, for example, turning the power off and then on, executing RAM clear, Etc.) As described above, in the third embodiment, even if the game ball enters the first main game starting opening BA12 while the auxiliary game shortened flag A is off, it is not immediately determined to be an error. In the situation where the auxiliary game time saving flag A is off, the first non-electric accessory A12hd is opened, and when the auxiliary game time saving flag A is off, the first non-electric accessory A12hd is closed. A certain number of game balls (in this example, it is two, but it is sufficient if the first non-electric accessory A12hd is in the open state to the closed state or more). It is configured to determine an error when the ball enters the first main game starting opening BA12. In the third embodiment, when the auxiliary gaming time saving flag A is on, the first non-electric accessory A12hd is opened, and after one variation, the auxiliary gaming time saving flag A is turned off. The auxiliary game time saving flag A is off and the first non-electric accessory A12hd is being opened. In such a case, in order not to cause an error, the auxiliary game time saving flag A is turned off when the first non-electric accessory A12hd is opened, Moreover, the condition of the error is that the auxiliary game shortened flag A is off even when the first non-electric accessory A12hd is closed.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the second non-electric auditors product drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1900 (third) of FIG. 41 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second non-electric auditors product opening flag (a flag that is turned on while the second non-electric auditors product B10hd is opened) is off. . If Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the player has entered the second opening entrance C23. If Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second non-electric auditors open flag. Next, in step 1908, the CPU MC of the main control board M releases the second non-electric accessory B10hd, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1900 (third)}. Further, in the case of No in step 1902, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a predetermined number (the number of balls to be closed by the second non-electric accessory B10hd) in the second main game starting opening B10. , 2 in this example) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error occurrence condition (the second non-electric accessory B10 is opened in the situation where the auxiliary game short time flag B is off). And, at the timing of Yes in step 1910, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game time saving flag B is off). If Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second non-electric accessory B10hd. Next, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second non-electric auditors accessory opening flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1997). Even if No in step 1910 or step 1904, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). In addition, in the case of No in step 1912, in step 1918, it is notified that an error has occurred, and error processing is executed (as error recovery conditions, for example, power is turned off → on, RAM clear is executed, Etc.) Thus, in the third embodiment, even if the game ball enters the second main game starting opening B10 in a situation where the auxiliary game time saving flag B is off, it is not immediately determined to be an error. , The second non-electric accessory B10hd is opened in the situation where the auxiliary game short time flag B is off, and the second non-electric accessory B10hd is closed in the situation where the auxiliary game short time flag B is off. There are a certain number of game balls (in this example, it is two, but it is sufficient if the second non-electric accessory B10hd is in the open state to the closed state or more). It is configured to determine an error when the ball enters the second main game starting port B10. It should be noted that the number of balls entering the error is the number of balls entering the first main game starting port BA12 in the case of the error of the first main game starting port BA12, and the second main game starting is the case of the error in the second main game starting port B10. It is configured to measure the error of the mouth B10 and determine the error. One ball enters the first main game starting opening BA12, one ball enters the second main game starting opening B10, and a total of two balls enter. It is not configured to determine an error because it has rolled. Incidentally, in the third embodiment, when the auxiliary game time saving flag B is on, the second non-electric accessory B10hd is opened, and after that, after one change, the auxiliary game time saving flag B is turned off. The auxiliary game time saving flag B is off and the second non-electric accessory B10hd is being opened. In such a case, in order not to cause an error, the auxiliary game time saving flag B is turned off when the second non-electric accessory B10hd is opened, Moreover, the condition of the error is that the auxiliary game shortened flag B is off even when the second non-electric accessory B10hd is closed.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 17 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 2514 (third) to step 2518 (third), that is, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes. After setting the command to, in step 2514 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol, the probability change transition notification jackpot symbol (the game state after the special game is a probability variation game It is a big hit symbol that will be notified during a special game that is in a state, and it is determined whether or not it is 3A, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2514 (third), in step 2516 (third), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S has the probability variation transition notification effect as a big hit mid-stage effect (the game state after the end of the big hit is a probability variation game state). Is set), and the process proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2514 (third), that is, the stop symbol relating to the current main game symbol is a probability variation non-notification big hit symbol (big hit which does not inform whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game) If it is a symbol and is 2A, 5A, 2B, 5B), in step 2518 (third), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is a probability change transition non-notification effect as a big hit medium effect (the game state after the big hit is a probability. A command for executing an effect that does not notify whether the game is in a variable game state) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. As described above, in the third embodiment, while the big hit related to the probability variation transition notification big hit symbol is being executed, the probability variation transition notification effect is executed, and after the big hit, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state A, or the probability. While notifying that the profit variation game state and the time shortening game state B are to be transitioned, while the probability variation transition non-report big jackpot jackpot execution is being performed, the probability variation transition non-report effect is executed, and the probability gain variation game after the jackpot is over. It is configured not to notify whether to shift to the state and the time-reduced game state B or to the non-probability gain variation game state and the time-reduced game state B. Incidentally, in the big hit related to the probability change notification big hit symbol, at the start of the big hit, it may be notified that the probability shift game state is entered after the big hit ends. In addition, during the big hit related to "7A / 7B", it is notified that the probability change game state and the time shortening game state B will be moved after the big hit ends, and during the big hit related to "3A", the probability change game state and time after the big hit ends. Informs that the game will move to the shortened game state A, and in the big hit related to "2A, 5A, 2B, 5B", only notifies that it will move to the time shortened game state B after the big hit, and shifts to the probability variation game state. It is configured not to notify whether or not.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third) of FIG. First, in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing at which the special game ends (is won), the timing at which the game state transitions, Etc.} is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the stopped jackpot symbol is the time saving B confirmed symbol (7A · 7B). If Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2634. Further, in the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is the time saving A confirmed symbol (3A). If Yes in step 2630, in step 2631, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2634. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 2630 (the jackpot pattern in the stop is 2A, 2B, 5A, 5B), in step 2632, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, "chance stage" as a stay stage (in the probability variation game state There is a stay stage that fuels whether or not there is a non-stochastic variation game state), and shifts to step 2634.

  Next, in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a stage promotion command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2634 (received when the symbol variation is executed 10 times in the situation where the probability variation game state and the stay stage are the “chance stage” after the jackpot), in step 2636, the sub-control board S CPUSC of sets the "night stage" as the stay stage (if the probability variation game state after the "chance stage" ends, shifts to the "night stage"), and performs the next process (process of step 2999). Transition. In addition, in the case of No in step 2634, in step 2638, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S has the current game state as the normal game state (the normal game state is a non-stochastic variation state and a non-time shortening game state). ) Or not. If Yes in step 2638, in step 2640, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “day stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2624 or 2638, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2999). As described above, in the third embodiment, the stay stage when the time shortening game state A is the game state is configured to be the “evening stage”, and the stay stage when the time shortening game state B is It is configured so that it can be a "night stage" or a "chance stage", and even if it is a time-reduced game state, it stays depending on whether the time-reduced game state is the time-reduced game state A or the time-reduced game state B. The stages can be different. Further, the stay stages in the time shortening game state B are configured such that a plurality of types of stay stages, that is, "night stage" and "chance stage" can be set. In addition, after the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A / 5B" that becomes the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state B after the special game ends, and after the special game ends, the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state B After the special game related to "2A / 2B" which is a jackpot pattern, the stay stage is the same "chance stage". In the third embodiment, the “chance stage” sets the stay stage as an effect to the end, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the “chance stage” is set as the stay stage, the limited frequency state is set. May be configured so that the average value of the fluctuation time becomes relatively long, and in such a case, it is a probability fluctuation game state in the relatively long fluctuation time. By frequently agitating whether or not the player is concerned, it can be configured to be more excited and absorbed in the game during a period in which the player pays attention to the game.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the auxiliary game time saving flag has two auxiliary game time saving flags A and auxiliary game time saving flags B, thereby shortening the time. As a game state, it is configured to have two time-reduced game states, a time-reduced game state A and a time-reduced game state B. In the time-reduced game state A, the timing at which the electric accessory is opened for a long time (easy to enter the game ball) The timing) becomes the first half, and in the time shortening game state B, the timing at which the electric accessory opens long (timing at which the game ball easily enters) is the second half. Moreover, since the distribution member is the first mode in the first half part and the distribution member is the second mode in the latter half part, the distribution part in which the electric accessory is installed in the time reduction game state A. When a game ball enters the ball entrance, it enters the first open entrance, and in the time saving game state B, the game ball enters the sorting entrance where the electric accessory is installed. In this case, the player will enter the second opening entrance, and if a game ball enters the first opening entrance, the first non-electric accessory installed in the first main game starting opening will When the game ball is opened and the game ball enters the second opening entrance, the first non-electric accessory that is installed at the second main game starting opening is opened. The game progresses by entering a ball into the first main game starting opening, and in the case of the time saving game state B, playing by entering a ball into the second main game starting opening. It is possible to create a novel game property having different game properties depending on whether the time reduction game state is the time reduction game state A or the time reduction game state B even in one probability variation game state in which Becomes

(First modification from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is illustrated, but such a novel gaming property can be applied to gaming machines having various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a first modified example from the third embodiment, and only the modified points from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third variation 1) of FIG. 15 in the first modification from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1755 (third variation 1) to step 1757 (third variation 1) and step 1761 (third variation 1), that is, the main game probability variation flag is turned on in step 1754. After that, in step 1755 (third variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1756 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current stop symbol is a short-time A big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that has a relatively small number of time-shortening given after the big hit ends. In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 2A / 3A / 2B). If Yes in step 1756 (third variation 1), in step 1757 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the hour / hour counter MP52c to have a predetermined value A (a relatively small hour / hour count, (80 times in the example) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1758. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (third variation 1), in other words, the current stop symbol is a short-time B big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol that has a relatively large number of time-savings given after the big-hit is finished, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B), in step 1761 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined value B (a relatively large time saving count, which is the present example). Then, 100 times) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1762. Thus, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the probability variation game state is configured to end when the symbol variation of a predetermined number of times ends after the jackpot (similar to this embodiment). The number of times saved and shortened after the big hit is designed to be different depending on the big hit pattern. Further, the maximum value of the number of time-savings given after the jackpot is 100 times, while the maximum value of the number of probability changes given after the completion of the jackpot is 80 times, and the maximum value of the number of time-savings is larger. Has become. In addition, the number of time saving after the big hit on the first main game side is 80 times, while the number of time saving after the big hit on the second main game side is 100 times, after the big hit on the first main game side. The number of times of shortening is smaller than the number of times of shortening after the big hit on the side of the second main game (the number of times of shortening on the side of the second main game is more advantageous for the player). Incidentally, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, there is a case of shifting to the time shortening game state A and a case of shifting to the time shortening game state B after the big hit on the first main game side, while the second case After the jackpot on the main game side is finished, it may be configured to shift to only the time-reduced game state B. Further, in the first main game side, when the big hit in the time shortening game state A is won, the number of time saving after the big hit is relatively small, but when the big hit is made in the time shortening game state B. May be configured so that the number of time saving after the jackpot is relatively large. Also, on the second main gaming side, when the big hit is won in the time-reduced game state A and when the big hit is won in the time-reduced game state B, the number of times saved after the big hit is relatively large. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the third embodiment and the first modification from the third embodiment, the number of probability changes and the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit may be configured as follows.
(1) The number of probability changes after all big hits is set to 80, and the number of time saving is set to a predetermined value A = 80 and a predetermined value B = 100.
(2) After the completion of all the big hits, the number of probability changes is set to 80, and the number of time saving is set to a predetermined value A = 60 and a predetermined value B = 80.
(3) After the completion of all the big hits, the number of probability changes is set to 80, and the number of time saving is set to a predetermined value A = 60 and a predetermined value B = 100.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 1 from the third embodiment, the probability variation game state can be terminated by a predetermined number of symbol variation terminations after the end of the special game. However, in the case of the time-reduced game state A, the probability variation number and the shortened number of times are set to the same value, and in the time-reduced game state B, which is more advantageous to the player than in the time-reduced game state A, the number of time-reduced numbers is larger than the probability variation number. By configuring as described above, it is possible to realize more distinct game playability.

(Modification 2 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is illustrated, but such a novel gaming property can be applied to gaming machines having various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a second modified example from the third embodiment, and only the changed points from the third embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 15 in the second modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are steps 1786-1 (third variation 2) to step 1786-4 (third variation 2), step 1757 (third variation 2) and step 1761 (third variation 2). Yes, that is, in step 1786-1 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2. Next, in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has reached a specified value (4 in this example). To do. If Yes in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), in step 1786-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1786-4 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current stop symbol is a time saving A big hit symbol (the auxiliary game time saving flag when shifting to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the big hit). A is a big hit symbol that is turned on, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 3A / 2B). If Yes in step 1786-4 (third variation 2), in step 1757 (third variation 2), the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined value A (a relatively small time saving number. , 80 times in this example), and the process proceeds to step 1758.

  Further, in step 1760, the stop symbol is a short-time B big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol in which the auxiliary game time-short flag B is turned on when the non-stochastic variation game state is entered after the big-hit is finished, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, 7B), or after turning on the main game probability variation flag in step 1754, in step 1761 (third variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined value B (relative The number of times is shorter than usual, which is 100 times in this example), and the process proceeds to step 1762. If No in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1754, and if No in step 1786-4 (third variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1760. In this way, in the second modification from the third embodiment, the limiter machine is the same as in the second embodiment, and the jackpot won in the probability variation game state is the predetermined number of times (reaching the limiter). And after the predetermined number of big hits, it will shift to a non-stochastic variation game state, but depending on the big hit pattern related to the predetermined number of big hits, (1) the time shortening game state shifts and the time saving number is relatively To be in one of the three game states: (80), (2) time shortening game state and relatively high number of time saving (100 times), and (3) non-time shortening game state. It is configured. In addition, the average value of the number of times saved and shortened when the limiter is reached and the time is shortened to a gaming state after the end of the big hit (or the number of times saved and shortened for all jackpots calculated by setting the number of times saved to 0 when the time is not shortened to the gaming state) The average value is greater after the big hit on the second main game side than after the big hit on the first main game side. In addition, when the probability variation continuous counter value has not reached the specified value, that is, in the case of No in step 1786-2 (third variation 2), the auxiliary game shortened flag A may be turned on, Specifically, if the big hit for which the probability variation continuous counter value does not reach the specified value after the big hit is the big hit on the first main game side, the gaming state after the big hit is "time saving game state A: time shortening". If the big hit that the probability variation continuous counter value does not become the specified value after the big hit ends is the big hit on the second main game side, the game state after the big hit ends is The big hit on the side of the first main game was the big hit on the first main game side, which was configured to shift at a ratio of "time shortened game state A: time shortened game state B = 1: 9", and the probability variation continuous counter value became the specified value after the big hit ended. In that case The game state after the end shifts at the ratio of "time-reduced game state A: time-reduced game state B = 5: 1", and after the big hit ends, the big variation on the second main game side is a big hit whose probability variation continuous counter value becomes a specified value. If so, the gaming state after the jackpot may be shifted to the 100% time shortened gaming state B. With such a configuration, by shifting to the time shortening game state B until the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value, it is advantageous for the player even after the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value. It is possible to set a gaming state that is advantageous compared to the time shortened gaming state A, and create a gaming property of how to shift to the time shortened gaming state B before the probability variation continuous counter value reaches a specified value. You will be able to do it.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the third embodiment, when the jackpot won in the probability variation game state continues for a predetermined number of times, the jackpot of the predetermined number of times ends. Even when it is configured to shift to the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state later, after the big hit is finished by the big hit symbol related to the predetermined number of big hits, the time reduction game state A, the time reduction game state B, the non-time It is possible to make the gaming machine highly entertaining such that the number of game balls acquired varies depending on the timing of winning the jackpot pattern of the player by configuring which of the shortened gaming states the gaming state shifts to is different. it can.

  In addition, in the second modification from the third embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, there is a case of shifting to the time shortening game state A and a case of shifting to the time shortening game state B, while the second After the jackpot on the main game side is finished, it may be configured to shift to only the time-reduced game state B. Further, in the first main game side, when the big hit in the time shortening game state A is won, the number of time saving after the big hit is relatively small, but when the big hit is made in the time shortening game state B. May be configured so that the number of time saving after the jackpot is relatively large. Also, on the second main gaming side, when the big hit is won in the time-reduced game state A and when the big hit is won in the time-reduced game state B, the number of times saved after the big hit is relatively large. It may be configured to be.

(Modification 3 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is illustrated, but such a novel gaming property can be applied to gaming machines having various specifications. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment as a game machine having a plurality of time-reduced game states is referred to as a third modified example from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 10 in the third modification from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 3050 (third variation 3), that is, after shifting the hold information in step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes in step 3050 (third variation 3). Then, the falling lottery execution processing to be described later is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1408.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the falling lottery execution processing according to the subroutine of step 3050 (third variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the third modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUMC of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (1/50 in this example) a falling lottery (whether to shift from the probability variation game state to the non-probability variation game state). Lottery). Next, in step 3056, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the falling lottery has been won. If Yes in step 3056, in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1408). Even if No in step 3052 or step 3056, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1408).

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 3 from the third embodiment, the falling lottery is executed for each symbol variation in the probability variation gaming state, and the falling lottery is performed. By configuring to shift to the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state when elected, in the gaming machine having a plurality of auxiliary gaming time saving flags, the profit ratio in the probability variation gaming status differs depending on which auxiliary gaming time saving flag is on. At the same time, by probing whether or not the probability variation game state advantageous for the player is ended for each symbol variation, it is possible to make the gaming machine highly entertaining.

  In the modified example 3 from the third embodiment, the number of saved time after the big hit may be configured to be different depending on the big hit design, and in such a case, the big hit on the second main game side. The average value of the guaranteed time saving times may be set to be larger after the end than after the big hit on the first main game side. Here, the guarantee is a time-saving game until the guaranteed time variation of the symbol is completed, even if the probability variation game state is changed to the non-probability variation game state by winning the falling lottery. It means that the state will continue, and more specifically, (1) the first main game side is guaranteed 50 times, and the second main game side is guaranteed. The number of times saved is 100 times, and (2) when there are 50 times and 100 times that can be guaranteed, after the big hit on the second main game side is greater than after the big hit on the first main game side. Also, it may be configured such that 100 times are easily selected. Further, even if the number of fluctuations after the big hit exceeds the guaranteed number of times, if the probability fluctuation game state continues (when it does not fall), the time shortening game state also continues. Also, if you win the falling lottery after that, the time shortened gaming state will also end, but the timing when the time shortened gaming state ends is (1) when the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation won in the falling lottery starts , (2) At the end of the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation won in the falling lottery, (3) At the start of the fluctuation of the next fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation won in the falling lottery. In addition, it is not necessary to configure to guarantee the number of times saved, and a jackpot that ends the time-saving game state at the end of the fixed number of times (for example, 50 times) symbol fluctuation may be provided. Further, the above configurations may be combined, and specifically, a jackpot pattern in which the number of times saved is fixed at 50 times, a jackpot pattern in which the guaranteed number of times saved is 50, and the number of guaranteed times saved is 100 You may provide a jackpot pattern that turns. In such a case, after the big hit on the second main game side, in order of easy selection, "100 time saving times guaranteed → 50 time saving times guaranteed → 50 time saving times fixed", the first main game. After the end of the big hit on the side, it may be configured in the order of easy selection, such as "fixed 50 times saved → guaranteed 50 times saved → guaranteed 100 saved times".

(Modification 4 from the third embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is illustrated, but such a novel gaming property can be applied to gaming machines having various specifications. Therefore, as a gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as Modification 4 of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 57 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is that the special winning opening is two, that is, the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20, and that the second special winning opening C20 is a special game during the special game. By doing so, it has a specific area C22 in which the right to shift to the probability variation game state can be acquired.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an example of a main game table in Modification 4 from the third embodiment. The gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the third embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round (round in which the second special winning opening C20 is opened) in the special game execution. By doing so, it is configured to shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game (so-called ball-determining machine). Further, as the opening mode of the second big winning opening C20 in the distribution game execution round, a long opening that allows the game ball to easily enter the specific area C22, and a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area C22. The big hit that becomes the long open is a long open big hit, and the big hit that becomes the short open is a short open big hit. As types of big hits, "2A / 2B" is a 4R short open big hit, "3A / 5A / 5B" is a 4R long open big hit, and "7A / 7B" is a 16R long open big hit. From the first main game side Also, the ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit is higher on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 6 in the modified example 4 from the third embodiment. Changes from the third embodiment are step 1711 (third variation 4) and step 3100 (third variation 4), that is, after setting a special game start display instruction command to the sub side in step 1708, Alternatively, if the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1710, in step 1711 (third variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the current round is the distribution game execution round (in this example, the second R). Or not. In the case of Yes in step 1711 (third variation 4), in step 3100 (third variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution processing described later, and proceeds to step 1734.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 3100 (third variation 4) of FIG. 59 in the fourth modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 3102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution game in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 3102, the process moves to step 3116. On the other hand, if No in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPU MC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot pattern that opens for a time, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). , An opening pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 almost deterministic, and the process proceeds to step 3110. In the case of No in step 3104, in other words, when the stop symbol is 2A, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the short opening pattern as the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. (For example, the opening pattern is designed so that the non-ball entering into the specific area C22 is substantially deterministic when the opening is 0.1 seconds), and the process proceeds to step 3110. In the second embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "324/1024", which is the second main game. The long open symbol on the side is "5B / 7B", and the proportion selected during the big hit is "824/1024", so the big hit on the second main game side is larger than the big hit on the first main game side. In the distribution game execution round, the second big winning opening C20 has a high rate of being long opened, that is, the game ball is easily inserted into the specific area C22 at the time of a big hit. Incidentally, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which the probability variation game state ends by the end of the symbol variation, a predetermined number of times after the completion of the big hit as described above, the big hit on the second main game side In addition, although it is not shown in the figure, even in the long open big hit, the auxiliary game short time flag A is turned on after the big hit and the auxiliary game short time flag B is turned on. There is such a big hit, and the ratio of the long open big hit on the second main game side is higher than the long open big hit on the first main game side, when the auxiliary game short-time flag B which is advantageous to the player is turned on. Has become.

  Next, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 3112, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game continuation flag. Next, in step 3114, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 3116.

  Next, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. . If Yes in step 3116, the process moves to step 3120. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3116, in step 3118, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 3118, the process moves to step 3120. Next, in step 3120, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 3122, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game in-execution flag. Next, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 3124, in step 3126, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag and shifts to step 3128. Even if No in step 3124, the process proceeds to step 3128. Next, in step 3128, the CPUMC of the main control board M increments the round number counter by 1 (ends the distribution game execution round), and shifts to the next process (process of step 1734). Even if No in step 3118, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1734).

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 4 of the third embodiment, the special winning opening has a specific area, and the gaming ball enters the specific area during the big hit. Even in a gaming machine that transitions to a probability variation game state after the big hit ends, a big hit that is easy to enter the specific area and a big hit that is hard to enter the specific area are provided. Also, by configuring to have a big hit that shifts to the time shortening game state A after the big hit ends and a big hit that shifts to the time shortening game state B after the big hit end, whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state and the time shortening game It is possible to create a novel game property in which attention is paid to the two elements of whether to shift to the state A or the time shortening game state B.

  In the modification 4 from the third embodiment, when the jackpot that is won in the probability variation game state described above continues for a predetermined number of times, the game shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpots. It may be a machine (a so-called limiter machine), or may be a gaming machine (a so-called falling lottery machine) that executes a lottery that shifts to each non-stochastic variation game state in the probability variation game state.

A configuration example applicable to the fourth modification from the third embodiment will be exemplified below.
(1) The expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit on the second main game side is larger than the expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit on the first main game side.
(2) The ratio of long open big hits in the big hit on the second main game side (big hits that can easily enter a specific area in the distribution game execution round) is higher than the proportion of long open big hits in the big hit on the first main game side. .
(3) The variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit ends differs depending on whether or not the player hits a specific area during the big hit.
(4) Depending on whether or not the player hits a specific area during the big hit, the transition mode of the fluctuation pattern table referred to after the big hit is different (for example, big hit A: 20 fluctuation table 1 → 30 fluctuation table 2, big hit B: 50). Variation table 3).
(5) Depending on whether or not to enter a specific area during the big hit, whether or not to be in a probability variation game state after the big hit is different.
(6) Regardless of whether or not to enter a specific area during the big hit, after the big hit, the game shifts to a time-saving game state.
(7) The staying stage after the big hit ends depends on whether or not the player hits a specific area during the big hit.
(8) Depending on whether or not to hit a specific area during the big hit, the fluctuation tendency of the final fluctuation of the time shortening game state after the big hit is different (average of fluctuation time, effect mode, shortest fluctuation time that can be selected) ).
(9) The probability variation game state can be terminated by the number of symbol variations after the jackpot is finished (so-called ST machine), and after the jackpot on the second main game side, the probability variation game state is always entered. (There may be a case where the probability variation game state does not shift to after the big hit on the first main game side).
(10) The probability variation game state is configured not to end by the number of symbol variations after the jackpot is finished, and the probability variation game state is set after the jackpot on the first main game side and the jackpot on the second main game side are also ended. There are cases where it shifts and cases where it does not shift (after the big hit on the second main game side, it is easier to shift to the probability varying game state after the big hit ends than after the big hit on the first main game side, that is, the second The big hit on the main game side is more likely than the big hit on the first main game side to be a big hit that is more likely to enter a specific area in the distribution game execution round during the big hit).
In addition, since the above-mentioned configuration is configured to shift to the probability variation game state after the jackpot is over by entering a specific area in the sorting game execution round during the jackpot, it shifts to the probability variation game state. = Enter the specific area during the big hit, do not shift to the probability variation game state = Do not enter the specific area during the big hit.

(Fifth Modification from Third Embodiment)
In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the gaming machine having a plurality of time-reduced gaming states is illustrated, but such a novel gaming property can be applied to gaming machines having various specifications. Therefore, as a game machine having a plurality of time-reduced game states, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is referred to as a fifth modified example from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 61 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the fifth modification from the third embodiment. In the modified example 4 from the third embodiment, the first main game starting opening has two first main game starting opening AA10 and first main game starting opening BA12, and flows down the left side of the game area. The game ball is configured to easily enter the first main game starting opening AA10 and difficult to enter the first main game starting opening BA12, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area is the first main game starting opening AA10. It is configured to be difficult to enter and easy to enter the first main game starting opening BA12 (when the second non-electric accessory B11hd is open). Further, since the first main game starting opening BA12 is closed by the second non-electric accessory B11hd, it is difficult for the game ball to enter unless the second non-electric accessory B11hd is in the open state. Here, since the starting winning port corresponding to the first main game is configured such that a common winning / winning lottery, a symbol lottery, etc. are executed regardless of which game ball is entered, in practice, It should be added that the contents of the game are not different even if the game ball enters in any case.

  Next, below the game area (based on the center point of the game area), the distribution start opening unit C50 is provided. Although the details of the distribution start opening unit C50 will be described later, as shown in the figure, the distribution start opening unit C50 is provided with a first main game starting opening AA10 and a second main game starting opening B10. The game ball flowing down the game area is configured to be easily guided to one of the first main game starting opening AA10 and the second main game starting opening B10.

  Next, FIG. 62 is an overall view and an operation view of the distribution start port unit C50. First, the distribution start opening unit C50 is a common entrance C51 into which a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game that is provided below the common entrance C51 and flows down from the common entrance C51. A start-port distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left-right direction about a support shaft) that regularly distributes the balls to the left and right, and a start-port distribution member C50y are provided below the start distribution member C50y. A first main game starting opening AA10, a second main game starting opening B10 provided below the starting opening distribution member C50y, and a distribution starting opening unit provided below the starting opening distribution member C50y. A discharge opening capable of discharging the game ball in C50 to the outside of the distribution start opening unit C50 without entering the first main game starting opening AA10 and the second main game starting opening B10. The distribution starter unit C50 configured as described above tilts the game ball, which has flown into the common entrance C51, to the left and right of the starter distribution member C50y as shown by the dotted line box in the figure. By this, it is configured to guide to either one of the first main game starting port AA10 and the second main game starting port B10. For example, the case where the starting mouth distributing member C50y is tilting leftward is defined as the "first position", and the case where the starting mouth distributing member C50y is tilting rightward is defined as "second position". In the case of "position", under the condition that the starting opening distribution member C50y is in the "second position", the game ball flowing into the common entrance C51 is guided to the first main game starting opening AA10 side, and While the starting mouth distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", while the starting mouth distribution member C50y is in the "first position", the game ball flowing into the common entrance C51 is the second main While being guided to the game starting opening B10 side, the starting opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting movement of the starting outlet sorting member C50y in the left-right direction is configured to be performed by the weight of the game ball, and as a result, the game ball flowing into the common ball inlet C51 is mechanically operated. , A game ball is alternately distributed to either one of the first main game starting opening AA10 and the second main game starting opening B10 (1 game ball is distributed to either one and then to the other 1) It is designed with the intention of repeating the operation of distributing individual game balls).

In addition, when it is configured to have the distribution starter unit C50,
(1) It is configured as a gaming machine in which the probability variation game state can be terminated by the number of symbol variations after the jackpot is finished (so-called ST machine), and the one after the jackpot on the first main gaming side is on the second main gaming side. The number of shortening times given after the big hit ends is relatively larger than after the big hit ends, and the expected value of winning prize balls in the big hit on the first main game side is smaller than the expected value of winning ball prizes in the big hit on the second main game side.
(2) Probability variation depending on the number of times of symbol fluctuation after the big hit is configured into a gaming machine in which the gaming state can end (so-called ST machine), and after the big hit on the first main game side, the second main game side The number of time saving provided after the big hit ends is relatively smaller than after the big hit ends, and the expected prize ball value in the big hit on the first main game side is larger than the expected ball value expected value in the big hit on the second main game side.
(3) When a big hit that is won in the probability variation game state continues for a predetermined number of times, it is configured as a game machine that shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state after the predetermined number of big hits are finished (a so-called limiter machine). After the big hit on the main game side, the number of shortened times when the non-probability variation game state and the time shortened game state shift to after the big hit end is relatively larger than after the big hit on the second main game side, and the first main The expected value for winning a prize ball in the jackpot on the game side is smaller than the expected value for winning a prize ball in the jackpot on the second main game side.
(4) When a big hit that is won in the probability variation game state continues for a predetermined number of times, it is configured as a game machine that shifts to a non-stochastic variation game state after the predetermined number of times of big hits (so-called limiter machine), After the big hit on the main game side, the number of shortening times when the non-probability variation game state and the time shortening game state shift to after the big hit end is relatively smaller than after the big hit on the second main game side. The expected value of winning a prize ball on the big jackpot on the game side is higher than the expected value of award winning ball on the big jackpot on the second main game side.
(5) Each variation in the probability variation game state is configured as a game machine that executes a lottery that shifts to a non-probability variation game state (so-called falling lottery machine), and the second after the jackpot on the first main game side is finished The number of fluctuations in which it is guaranteed that the time shortening game state is guaranteed after the jackpot is over is larger than after the jackpot on the main game side, and the expected prize winning value in the jackpot on the first main game side is the second main game. It is less than the expected value for winning a prize ball on the side jackpot.
(6) Each variation in the probability variation game state is configured as a game machine that executes a lottery that shifts to a non-probability variation game state (so-called falling lottery machine), and the second after the jackpot on the first main game side is finished The number of fluctuations guaranteed to be in the time-reduced gaming state after the jackpot on the main game side is relatively smaller than after the jackpot on the main game side, and the expected value for winning a prize ball on the jackpot on the first main game side is the second main game. It is higher than the expected value of winning a prize in the side jackpot.
(7) In the distribution game execution round during the big hit, when the game ball enters a specific area within the big prize, the game machine can shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends (so-called ball Probably), after the big hit on the first main game side is longer than after the big hit on the second main game side, the opening mode of the big winning opening in the distribution game execution round is long open (relatively the game ball is The percentage of jackpots that make it easy to enter the ball is high (the percentage that is long-open jackpot is high), and the expected value of winning balls in the jackpot on the first main game side is the winning ball on the jackpot on the second main game side. Less than expected acquisition value.
(8) A game machine that can shift to a probability variation game state after the jackpot is completed by a game ball entering a specific area within the jackpot in the distribution game execution round during the jackpot (so-called ball Probably), after the big hit on the first main game side is longer than after the big hit on the second main game side, the opening mode of the big winning opening in the distribution game execution round is long open (relatively the game ball is The proportion of jackpots that are easy to enter (the opening aspect that makes it easy to enter) is low (the proportion that is a long-open jackpot is low), and the expected value of winning balls in the jackpot on the first main game side is the winning ball on the jackpot on the second main game side. More than expected value.
(9) A game machine that can shift to a probability variation game state after the jackpot is completed by entering a game ball in a specific area within the jackpot in the sorting game execution round during the jackpot (so-called ball Probably), after the big hit on the first main game side is longer than after the big hit on the second main game side, the opening mode of the big winning opening in the distribution game execution round is long open (relatively the game ball is The percentage of jackpots that are easy to enter (the opening aspect that makes it easy to enter) is high (the percentage that is long open jackpot is high), and the time after the jackpot on the first main game side is shorter than after the jackpot on the second main game side The frequency is relatively low.
(10) In the distribution game execution round during the big hit, when the game ball enters a specific area within the big prize, the game machine can shift to a probability variation game state after the big hit ends (so-called ball Probably), after the big hit on the first main game side is longer than after the big hit on the second main game side, the opening mode of the big winning opening in the distribution game execution round is long open (relatively the game ball is The proportion of jackpots that are easy to enter (the opening aspect that makes it easy to enter) is low (the proportion that is long open jackpots is low), and it is shorter after the jackpot on the first main game side than after the jackpot on the second main game side. The number of times is relatively high.
It may be configured as described above.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process according to step 1300 in FIG. 3 in Modification 5 from the third embodiment. First, changes from the third embodiment are as follows: Step 1302 (third variation 5) Step 1303 (third variation 5), Step 1307 (third variation 5), Step 1309 (third variation 5), Step 1317 ( Regarding the third variation 5) and step 1319 (third variation 5), that is, in step 1302 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M has won the first main game starting opening AA10. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1302 (third variation 5), the process proceeds to step 1304, and if No, in step 1303 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the first main game starting opening BA12. It is determined whether or not there is a prize. If Yes in step 1303 (third variation 5), the process moves to step 1304, and if No, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1400). Further, after acquiring the first main game content determination random number in step 1306, in step 1307 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side. With reference to the above, the current total pending quantity is acquired, and “total pending quantity + 1” is derived as the winning order of a new winning. Next, in step 1309 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the acquired first main game content determination random number and the derived winning order in the RAM area of the main control board M as suspension information. It is stored, and the process proceeds to step 1310.

  Further, after obtaining the second main game content determination random number in step 1316, in step 1317 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the hold information of the first main game side and the second main game side. With reference to the above, the current total pending quantity is acquired, and “total pending quantity + 1” is derived as the winning order of a new winning. Next, in step 1319 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the acquired second main game content determination random number and the derived winning order in the RAM area of the main control board M as suspension information. It is stored, and the process proceeds to step 1320.

  Thus, in the modified example 5 from the third embodiment, the distribution start opening unit C50 is provided, and in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, when left-handing is executed to advance the game, Since the hold of one main game side (up to 4) and the hold of the second main game side (up to 4) can occur alternately, a maximum of 8 hold can be accumulated.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to step 1400 in the fifth modification from the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is about step 1402 (third variation 5), and the purpose thereof is to realize winning order digestion of main game suspension. That is, when the processing of the subroutine is executed, in step 1402 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the hold information on the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first winning order. It is determined whether or not the hold is for the first main game side. If Yes in step 1402 (third variation 5), in step 1400 (1), a process relating to variation of the first main game symbol is executed. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1402 (third variation 5), in step 1400 (2), the process relating to the variation of the second main game symbol is executed.

  Thus, in the modified example 5 from the third embodiment, it is configured to execute the hold digestion according to the winning order, but is not limited to this, the second main game symbol (first main game symbol). If there is a hold ball, regardless of the existence of the hold ball of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) {even if the winning order is the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) It may be configured first), and the second main game symbol (first main game symbol) may be configured to be preferentially executed for the hold digestion, or a parallel lottery in which both main game symbols are simultaneously drawn in parallel. It may be configured to execute.

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process relating to steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 64 in the fifth modification from the third embodiment. First, the change from the third embodiment is about step 1404 (third variation 5), and the purpose is to appropriately update the winning order of the remaining hold each time the main game hold is exhausted. is there. That is, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied in step 1403, in step 1404 (third variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs the hold information on the first main game side (hold information on the second main game side). The information is read out and deleted from the on-hold information, the remaining on-hold information is shifted, and the winning order of each on-hold is decremented by 1 (hereinafter, the process relating to the main game variation is executed).

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 5 from the third embodiment, the left-hand hit is executed in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state to proceed the game. In this case, the game balls that have entered the distribution start port unit C50 are alternately distributed to the first main game start port and the second main game start port, and the second main game will be a big hit on the first main game side. It is possible to realize a game in which the profit rate of the player is different depending on whether or not a big hit is made on the side. Also, in the probability variation game state or the time shortened game state, when the right hit is executed and the game progresses, the second non-electric accessory is opened to cause the second main game start opening in the distribution start opening unit C50. By arranging the game ball to be able to enter, it is possible to provide a novel game machine having the same structure as the third embodiment and having the distribution start opening unit C50.

  The configuration having the distribution starter unit C50 as in the modified example 5 from the third embodiment may be applied to any of the configurations of the above-described present embodiment to the modified example 4 from the third embodiment. .

Further, in the gaming machine according to this example, the following configuration may be applied.
(1) Parallel lottery can be executed.
(2) has a small hit on the second main gaming side, or the small hit winning percentage on the second main gaming side is higher than the small hit winning percentage on the first main gaming side (3) second main gaming symbol The variation time is relatively short in the probability variation game state (for example, the average value is 3 seconds), and relatively long in the other game states (for example, the average value is 300 seconds).
(4) The prize ball expected value excluding the big hit, or the prize ball expected value due to the small hit is the highest in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state among all the game states. (5) By winning the small hit It is possible to shift from the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state to the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state.
(6) It has a small hit on the second main game side, and in the time shortened game state B, the fluctuation efficiency is better than in the time shortened game state A (the average value of the fluctuation time is short), and the time is shortened. By hitting right in the game state B, the small hit is frequently won.

In addition, the following configurations may be applied to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment to the fifth modification from the third embodiment.
(1) It has a first main game side and a second main game side, and if the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold exist, the second main game side The priority is given to digesting from the hold.
(2) In the non-time shortening game state, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the first main game side can be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the second main game side cannot be executed.
(3) In the time shortening game state A, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the first main game side can be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the second main game side cannot be executed.
(4) In the time saving game state B, the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the first main game side cannot be executed, and the prefetch lottery (prefetch effect) on the second main game side can be executed.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main gaming timer, MP11t-C2 2nd main gaming timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Starting mouth electric accessory release timer, MP33c prize ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c time reduction counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hitting game timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer A first main game peripheral Equipment A10 1st main game starting opening (1st main game starting opening A), A11s 1st main game starting entrance ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display section A21h 1st main Game symbol hold display section, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game starting opening, B11s 2nd main Technique start mouth entrance detection device B11d second main game start mouth electric accessory, B20 second main game symbol display device B21g second main game symbol display portion, B21h second main game symbol hold display portion C 1st and 2nd Main game common peripheral device, C10 1st prize winning opening C11s 1st prize winning prize winning detection device, C11d 1st prize winning mouth electric accessory C20 2nd prize winning prize, C21s 2nd prize winning prize winning detection device C21d 2nd Special winning opening electric prize, C22 specific area C23 second winning opening outlet, C23s second winning opening discharge detecting device C24 upper shielding member, C25 lower shielding member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening detecting device C20-1 Box-shaped member H Auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game start opening H11s Auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary Technical symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM21t design variation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 number of consecutive games counter SM24t power-on timer SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern display Area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, MT10 command transmission buffer MP51c-2 probability variation continuous counter , MN52c-1 Limited frequency counter A
MN52c-2 Limited frequency counter B, A12 1st main game start opening B
A12hd first non-electrical accessory, B10hd second non-electrical accessory D10d electric accessory, C20 distribution entrance C22 first opening entrance, C23 second opening entrance C22s first opening entrance entrance Detecting device, C23s second opening entrance entrance detecting device C24 distribution member, C50 distribution starter unit C51 common entrance port, C50y starter distribution member

Claims (1)

A first main game start opening where game balls can enter,
A second main game start opening that allows game balls to enter,
Auxiliary game start opening where game balls can enter,
With a sorting entrance that allows game balls to enter,
It is a variable member attached to the first main game starting port and displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the first main game starting port or is compared with the closed state. Then, it is easy to enter the ball, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the variable member A is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the first main game starting port as compared to the inoperable state or the open state,
A variable member that is attached to the second main game starting port and can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, a game ball can enter the second main game starting port or is compared with the closed state. And a variable member B that is easy to enter and is difficult to enter when the game ball is unable to enter the second main game starting port or is in the open state when displaced to the closed state,
It is a variable member attached to the distribution entrance, which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the distribution entrance or compared to the closed state. A variable member C that is easy to enter and is configured to be difficult to enter when the game ball is unable to enter the distribution entrance ball when it is displaced to the closed state or in the open state,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a ball can enter, and a first opening provided downstream of the sorting ball entrance,
A game ball is a ball entrance into which a ball can enter, and a second opening provided downstream of the sorting ball entrance,
A member that changes the downward direction of the game ball that has entered the distribution ball opening toward either the first opening or the second opening, and when the game ball is displaced to the first mode, the game opens in the first opening. The sphere is easy to enter, and when the game ball is inserted into the second opening when it is displaced in the second mode, the distribution member configured to be easy to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display section capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
With an auxiliary game unit that supports the main game,
The main game department is
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first main game starting opening,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied. Means and
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first main game identification information display unit variably displays the first main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the first main game identification information. One main game identification information display control means,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second main game starting opening,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is satisfied. Means and
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second main game identification information display unit variably displays the second main game identification information, and then controls to stop and display the second main game identification information. Two main game identification information display control means,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, it is variable until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning a prize port or a predetermined period has elapsed. And a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make the winning opening advantageous to the player,
The variable member A is configured to be in an open state by entering a ball into the first opening.
The variable member B can be opened by entering the second opening.
Auxiliary game department,
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number when the game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening,
Auxiliary game identification information display control for performing a win / fail judgment based on the auxiliary game random number acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, and controlling the auxiliary game identification information display unit to variably display and then stop the auxiliary game identification information. Means and
If the result of the success / failure determination based on the auxiliary game random number is a win, after the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable member C is closed within the displacement driving period in which the variable member C can be displaced. After displacing from the state to the open state, the operation to displacing the closed state is performed once or a plurality of times, and an easy-ball-entering game determination executing means for executing an easy-ball entering game determination executing means,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the first main game identification information or the second main game The identification information has a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is higher than the predetermined probability.
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member C, there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member C is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state.
As the specific game state, there is a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which the displacement mode of the variable member C when the easy-enter ball game is executed is different from the first specific game state. ,
It is configured so that the distribution member can be displaced upon execution of the easy-entering ball game,
When the easy-ball game is executed, the distribution member is configured to be displaced to the second mode after maintaining the first mode for a predetermined time,
An expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification It is configured such that the expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the information belonging to the predetermined group is different,
As a special game, a special game A that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a first specific game state after the special game is finished, and a special game B that is in a high-probability lottery state and is in a second specific game state after the special game is finished, Have at least
The ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by the stop display of the first main game identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, and the second main game identification information in the predetermined group It is configured so that the ratio of being in the second specific game state after the end of the special game executed by being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode to which it belongs is different,
When the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and is in a high probability lottery state after the end of the special game executed, it is in a high probability lottery state and the second identification The percentage of the gaming state is a high probability lottery when the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group and becomes a high probability lottery state after the special game executed. It is configured to be smaller than the ratio of being in the state and the second specific game state ,
There is a first specific hold that is the first hold that satisfies the first predetermined condition, and the first hold is that the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied before the first specific hold. In a situation where the first pre-hold is present, the first pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the first specific hold can be executed in the effect display unit,
There is a second specific hold that is a second hold that satisfies the second predetermined condition, and is a second hold that satisfies the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information before the second specific hold. Under the situation where the second pre-hold is present, the second pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation degree of the special game related to the second specific hold can be executed in the effect display unit,
In the high probability lottery state and the first specific game state, the first prefetch effect can be executed, while the second prefetch effect is not executed,
In a high probability lottery state and a second specific game state, the second prefetch effect can be executed, while the first prefetch effect is configured not to be executed Pachinko game machine .

Images